|
7
|
1 /* vi:set ts=8 sts=4 sw=4:
|
|
|
2 *
|
|
|
3 * VIM - Vi IMproved by Bram Moolenaar
|
|
|
4 *
|
|
|
5 * Do ":help uganda" in Vim to read copying and usage conditions.
|
|
|
6 * Do ":help credits" in Vim to see a list of people who contributed.
|
|
|
7 * See README.txt for an overview of the Vim source code.
|
|
|
8 */
|
|
|
9
|
|
|
10 /*
|
|
|
11 * Porting to GTK+ was done by:
|
|
|
12 *
|
|
70
|
13 * (C) 1998,1999,2000 by Marcin Dalecki <martin@dalecki.de>
|
|
7
|
14 *
|
|
|
15 * With GREAT support and continuous encouragements by Andy Kahn and of
|
|
|
16 * course Bram Moolenaar!
|
|
|
17 *
|
|
|
18 * Support for GTK+ 2 was added by:
|
|
|
19 *
|
|
|
20 * (C) 2002,2003 Jason Hildebrand <jason@peaceworks.ca>
|
|
|
21 * Daniel Elstner <daniel.elstner@gmx.net>
|
|
|
22 */
|
|
|
23
|
|
|
24 #include "vim.h"
|
|
|
25 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME
|
|
|
26 /* Gnome redefines _() and N_(). Grrr... */
|
|
|
27 # ifdef _
|
|
|
28 # undef _
|
|
|
29 # endif
|
|
|
30 # ifdef N_
|
|
|
31 # undef N_
|
|
|
32 # endif
|
|
|
33 # ifdef textdomain
|
|
|
34 # undef textdomain
|
|
|
35 # endif
|
|
|
36 # ifdef bindtextdomain
|
|
|
37 # undef bindtextdomain
|
|
|
38 # endif
|
|
|
39 # if defined(FEAT_GETTEXT) && !defined(ENABLE_NLS)
|
|
|
40 # define ENABLE_NLS /* so the texts in the dialog boxes are translated */
|
|
|
41 # endif
|
|
|
42 # include <gnome.h>
|
|
|
43 # include "version.h"
|
|
|
44 #endif
|
|
|
45
|
|
|
46 #if !defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK) && defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
47 /* When generating prototypes we don't want syntax errors. */
|
|
|
48 # define GdkAtom int
|
|
|
49 # define GdkEventExpose int
|
|
|
50 # define GdkEventFocus int
|
|
|
51 # define GdkEventVisibility int
|
|
|
52 # define GdkEventProperty int
|
|
|
53 # define GtkContainer int
|
|
|
54 # define GtkTargetEntry int
|
|
|
55 # define GtkType int
|
|
|
56 # define GtkWidget int
|
|
|
57 # define gint int
|
|
|
58 # define gpointer int
|
|
|
59 # define guint int
|
|
|
60 # define GdkEventKey int
|
|
|
61 # define GdkEventSelection int
|
|
|
62 # define GtkSelectionData int
|
|
|
63 # define GdkEventMotion int
|
|
|
64 # define GdkEventButton int
|
|
|
65 # define GdkDragContext int
|
|
|
66 # define GdkEventConfigure int
|
|
|
67 # define GdkEventClient int
|
|
|
68 #else
|
|
|
69 # include <gdk/gdkkeysyms.h>
|
|
|
70 # include <gdk/gdk.h>
|
|
|
71 # ifdef WIN3264
|
|
|
72 # include <gdk/gdkwin32.h>
|
|
|
73 # else
|
|
|
74 # include <gdk/gdkx.h>
|
|
|
75 # endif
|
|
|
76
|
|
|
77 # include <gtk/gtk.h>
|
|
|
78 # include "gui_gtk_f.h"
|
|
|
79 #endif
|
|
|
80
|
|
|
81 #ifdef HAVE_X11_SUNKEYSYM_H
|
|
|
82 # include <X11/Sunkeysym.h>
|
|
|
83 #endif
|
|
|
84
|
|
|
85 /*
|
|
|
86 * Easy-to-use macro for multihead support.
|
|
|
87 */
|
|
|
88 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD
|
|
|
89 # define GET_X_ATOM(atom) gdk_x11_atom_to_xatom_for_display( \
|
|
|
90 gtk_widget_get_display(gui.mainwin), atom)
|
|
|
91 #else
|
|
|
92 # define GET_X_ATOM(atom) ((Atom)(atom))
|
|
|
93 #endif
|
|
|
94
|
|
|
95 /* Selection type distinguishers */
|
|
|
96 enum
|
|
|
97 {
|
|
|
98 TARGET_TYPE_NONE,
|
|
|
99 TARGET_UTF8_STRING,
|
|
|
100 TARGET_STRING,
|
|
|
101 TARGET_COMPOUND_TEXT,
|
|
|
102 TARGET_TEXT,
|
|
|
103 TARGET_TEXT_URI_LIST,
|
|
|
104 TARGET_TEXT_PLAIN,
|
|
|
105 TARGET_VIM,
|
|
|
106 TARGET_VIMENC
|
|
|
107 };
|
|
|
108
|
|
|
109 /*
|
|
|
110 * Table of selection targets supported by Vim.
|
|
|
111 * Note: Order matters, preferred types should come first.
|
|
|
112 */
|
|
|
113 static const GtkTargetEntry selection_targets[] =
|
|
|
114 {
|
|
|
115 {VIMENC_ATOM_NAME, 0, TARGET_VIMENC},
|
|
|
116 {VIM_ATOM_NAME, 0, TARGET_VIM},
|
|
|
117 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
118 {"UTF8_STRING", 0, TARGET_UTF8_STRING},
|
|
|
119 #endif
|
|
|
120 {"COMPOUND_TEXT", 0, TARGET_COMPOUND_TEXT},
|
|
|
121 {"TEXT", 0, TARGET_TEXT},
|
|
|
122 {"STRING", 0, TARGET_STRING}
|
|
|
123 };
|
|
|
124 #define N_SELECTION_TARGETS (sizeof(selection_targets) / sizeof(selection_targets[0]))
|
|
|
125
|
|
|
126 #ifdef FEAT_DND
|
|
|
127 /*
|
|
|
128 * Table of DnD targets supported by Vim.
|
|
|
129 * Note: Order matters, preferred types should come first.
|
|
|
130 */
|
|
|
131 static const GtkTargetEntry dnd_targets[] =
|
|
|
132 {
|
|
|
133 {"text/uri-list", 0, TARGET_TEXT_URI_LIST},
|
|
|
134 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
135 {"UTF8_STRING", 0, TARGET_UTF8_STRING},
|
|
|
136 # endif
|
|
|
137 {"STRING", 0, TARGET_STRING},
|
|
|
138 {"text/plain", 0, TARGET_TEXT_PLAIN}
|
|
|
139 };
|
|
|
140 # define N_DND_TARGETS (sizeof(dnd_targets) / sizeof(dnd_targets[0]))
|
|
|
141 #endif
|
|
|
142
|
|
|
143
|
|
|
144 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
145 /*
|
|
|
146 * "Monospace" is a standard font alias that should be present
|
|
|
147 * on all proper Pango/fontconfig installations.
|
|
|
148 */
|
|
|
149 # define DEFAULT_FONT "Monospace 10"
|
|
|
150
|
|
|
151 #else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
152 /*
|
|
|
153 * This is the single only fixed width font in X11, which seems to be present
|
|
|
154 * on all servers and available in all the variants we need.
|
|
|
155 */
|
|
|
156 # define DEFAULT_FONT "-adobe-courier-medium-r-normal-*-14-*-*-*-m-*-*-*"
|
|
|
157
|
|
|
158 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
159
|
|
|
160 #if !(defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION))
|
|
|
161 /*
|
|
|
162 * Atoms used to communicate save-yourself from the X11 session manager. There
|
|
|
163 * is no need to move them into the GUI struct, since they should be constant.
|
|
|
164 */
|
|
|
165 static GdkAtom wm_protocols_atom = GDK_NONE;
|
|
|
166 static GdkAtom save_yourself_atom = GDK_NONE;
|
|
|
167 #endif
|
|
|
168
|
|
|
169 /*
|
|
|
170 * Atoms used to control/reference X11 selections.
|
|
|
171 */
|
|
|
172 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
173 static GdkAtom utf8_string_atom = GDK_NONE;
|
|
|
174 #endif
|
|
|
175 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
176 static GdkAtom compound_text_atom = GDK_NONE;
|
|
|
177 static GdkAtom text_atom = GDK_NONE;
|
|
|
178 #endif
|
|
|
179 static GdkAtom vim_atom = GDK_NONE; /* Vim's own special selection format */
|
|
|
180 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
181 static GdkAtom vimenc_atom = GDK_NONE; /* Vim's extended selection format */
|
|
|
182 #endif
|
|
|
183
|
|
|
184 /*
|
|
|
185 * Keycodes recognized by vim.
|
|
|
186 * NOTE: when changing this, the table in gui_x11.c probably needs the same
|
|
|
187 * change!
|
|
|
188 */
|
|
|
189 static struct special_key
|
|
|
190 {
|
|
|
191 guint key_sym;
|
|
|
192 char_u code0;
|
|
|
193 char_u code1;
|
|
|
194 }
|
|
|
195 const special_keys[] =
|
|
|
196 {
|
|
|
197 {GDK_Up, 'k', 'u'},
|
|
|
198 {GDK_Down, 'k', 'd'},
|
|
|
199 {GDK_Left, 'k', 'l'},
|
|
|
200 {GDK_Right, 'k', 'r'},
|
|
|
201 {GDK_F1, 'k', '1'},
|
|
|
202 {GDK_F2, 'k', '2'},
|
|
|
203 {GDK_F3, 'k', '3'},
|
|
|
204 {GDK_F4, 'k', '4'},
|
|
|
205 {GDK_F5, 'k', '5'},
|
|
|
206 {GDK_F6, 'k', '6'},
|
|
|
207 {GDK_F7, 'k', '7'},
|
|
|
208 {GDK_F8, 'k', '8'},
|
|
|
209 {GDK_F9, 'k', '9'},
|
|
|
210 {GDK_F10, 'k', ';'},
|
|
|
211 {GDK_F11, 'F', '1'},
|
|
|
212 {GDK_F12, 'F', '2'},
|
|
|
213 {GDK_F13, 'F', '3'},
|
|
|
214 {GDK_F14, 'F', '4'},
|
|
|
215 {GDK_F15, 'F', '5'},
|
|
|
216 {GDK_F16, 'F', '6'},
|
|
|
217 {GDK_F17, 'F', '7'},
|
|
|
218 {GDK_F18, 'F', '8'},
|
|
|
219 {GDK_F19, 'F', '9'},
|
|
|
220 {GDK_F20, 'F', 'A'},
|
|
|
221 {GDK_F21, 'F', 'B'},
|
|
|
222 {GDK_Pause, 'F', 'B'}, /* Pause == F21 according to netbeans.txt */
|
|
|
223 {GDK_F22, 'F', 'C'},
|
|
|
224 {GDK_F23, 'F', 'D'},
|
|
|
225 {GDK_F24, 'F', 'E'},
|
|
|
226 {GDK_F25, 'F', 'F'},
|
|
|
227 {GDK_F26, 'F', 'G'},
|
|
|
228 {GDK_F27, 'F', 'H'},
|
|
|
229 {GDK_F28, 'F', 'I'},
|
|
|
230 {GDK_F29, 'F', 'J'},
|
|
|
231 {GDK_F30, 'F', 'K'},
|
|
|
232 {GDK_F31, 'F', 'L'},
|
|
|
233 {GDK_F32, 'F', 'M'},
|
|
|
234 {GDK_F33, 'F', 'N'},
|
|
|
235 {GDK_F34, 'F', 'O'},
|
|
|
236 {GDK_F35, 'F', 'P'},
|
|
|
237 #ifdef SunXK_F36
|
|
|
238 {SunXK_F36, 'F', 'Q'},
|
|
|
239 {SunXK_F37, 'F', 'R'},
|
|
|
240 #endif
|
|
|
241 {GDK_Help, '%', '1'},
|
|
|
242 {GDK_Undo, '&', '8'},
|
|
|
243 {GDK_BackSpace, 'k', 'b'},
|
|
|
244 {GDK_Insert, 'k', 'I'},
|
|
|
245 {GDK_Delete, 'k', 'D'},
|
|
|
246 {GDK_3270_BackTab, 'k', 'B'},
|
|
|
247 {GDK_Clear, 'k', 'C'},
|
|
|
248 {GDK_Home, 'k', 'h'},
|
|
|
249 {GDK_End, '@', '7'},
|
|
|
250 {GDK_Prior, 'k', 'P'},
|
|
|
251 {GDK_Next, 'k', 'N'},
|
|
|
252 {GDK_Print, '%', '9'},
|
|
|
253 /* Keypad keys: */
|
|
|
254 {GDK_KP_Left, 'k', 'l'},
|
|
|
255 {GDK_KP_Right, 'k', 'r'},
|
|
|
256 {GDK_KP_Up, 'k', 'u'},
|
|
|
257 {GDK_KP_Down, 'k', 'd'},
|
|
|
258 {GDK_KP_Insert, KS_EXTRA, (char_u)KE_KINS},
|
|
|
259 {GDK_KP_Delete, KS_EXTRA, (char_u)KE_KDEL},
|
|
|
260 {GDK_KP_Home, 'K', '1'},
|
|
|
261 {GDK_KP_End, 'K', '4'},
|
|
|
262 {GDK_KP_Prior, 'K', '3'}, /* page up */
|
|
|
263 {GDK_KP_Next, 'K', '5'}, /* page down */
|
|
|
264
|
|
|
265 {GDK_KP_Add, 'K', '6'},
|
|
|
266 {GDK_KP_Subtract, 'K', '7'},
|
|
|
267 {GDK_KP_Divide, 'K', '8'},
|
|
|
268 {GDK_KP_Multiply, 'K', '9'},
|
|
|
269 {GDK_KP_Enter, 'K', 'A'},
|
|
|
270 {GDK_KP_Decimal, 'K', 'B'},
|
|
|
271
|
|
|
272 {GDK_KP_0, 'K', 'C'},
|
|
|
273 {GDK_KP_1, 'K', 'D'},
|
|
|
274 {GDK_KP_2, 'K', 'E'},
|
|
|
275 {GDK_KP_3, 'K', 'F'},
|
|
|
276 {GDK_KP_4, 'K', 'G'},
|
|
|
277 {GDK_KP_5, 'K', 'H'},
|
|
|
278 {GDK_KP_6, 'K', 'I'},
|
|
|
279 {GDK_KP_7, 'K', 'J'},
|
|
|
280 {GDK_KP_8, 'K', 'K'},
|
|
|
281 {GDK_KP_9, 'K', 'L'},
|
|
|
282
|
|
|
283 /* End of list marker: */
|
|
|
284 {0, 0, 0}
|
|
|
285 };
|
|
|
286
|
|
|
287 /*
|
|
|
288 * Flags for command line options table below.
|
|
|
289 */
|
|
|
290 #define ARG_FONT 1
|
|
|
291 #define ARG_GEOMETRY 2
|
|
|
292 #define ARG_REVERSE 3
|
|
|
293 #define ARG_NOREVERSE 4
|
|
|
294 #define ARG_BACKGROUND 5
|
|
|
295 #define ARG_FOREGROUND 6
|
|
|
296 #define ARG_ICONIC 7
|
|
|
297 #define ARG_ROLE 8
|
|
|
298 #define ARG_NETBEANS 9
|
|
|
299 #define ARG_XRM 10 /* ignored */
|
|
|
300 #define ARG_MENUFONT 11 /* ignored */
|
|
|
301 #define ARG_INDEX_MASK 0x00ff
|
|
|
302 #define ARG_HAS_VALUE 0x0100 /* a value is expected after the argument */
|
|
|
303 #define ARG_NEEDS_GUI 0x0200 /* need to initialize the GUI for this */
|
|
|
304 #define ARG_FOR_GTK 0x0400 /* argument is handled by GTK+ or GNOME */
|
|
|
305 #define ARG_COMPAT_LONG 0x0800 /* accept -foo but substitute with --foo */
|
|
|
306 #define ARG_KEEP 0x1000 /* don't remove argument from argv[] */
|
|
|
307
|
|
|
308 /*
|
|
|
309 * This table holds all the X GUI command line options allowed. This includes
|
|
|
310 * the standard ones so that we can skip them when Vim is started without the
|
|
|
311 * GUI (but the GUI might start up later).
|
|
|
312 *
|
|
|
313 * When changing this, also update doc/gui_x11.txt and the usage message!!!
|
|
|
314 */
|
|
|
315 typedef struct
|
|
|
316 {
|
|
|
317 const char *name;
|
|
|
318 unsigned int flags;
|
|
|
319 }
|
|
|
320 cmdline_option_T;
|
|
|
321
|
|
|
322 static const cmdline_option_T cmdline_options[] =
|
|
|
323 {
|
|
|
324 /* We handle these options ourselves */
|
|
|
325 {"-fn", ARG_FONT|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
326 {"-font", ARG_FONT|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
327 {"-geom", ARG_GEOMETRY|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
328 {"-geometry", ARG_GEOMETRY|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
329 {"-rv", ARG_REVERSE},
|
|
|
330 {"-reverse", ARG_REVERSE},
|
|
|
331 {"+rv", ARG_NOREVERSE},
|
|
|
332 {"+reverse", ARG_NOREVERSE},
|
|
|
333 {"-bg", ARG_BACKGROUND|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
334 {"-background", ARG_BACKGROUND|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
335 {"-fg", ARG_FOREGROUND|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
336 {"-foreground", ARG_FOREGROUND|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
337 {"-iconic", ARG_ICONIC},
|
|
|
338 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
339 {"--role", ARG_ROLE|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
340 #endif
|
|
|
341 #ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG
|
|
|
342 {"-nb", ARG_NETBEANS}, /* non-standard value format */
|
|
|
343 {"-xrm", ARG_XRM|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, /* not implemented */
|
|
|
344 {"-mf", ARG_MENUFONT|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, /* not implemented */
|
|
|
345 {"-menufont", ARG_MENUFONT|ARG_HAS_VALUE}, /* not implemented */
|
|
|
346 #endif
|
|
|
347 #if 0 /* not implemented; these arguments don't make sense for GTK+ */
|
|
|
348 {"-boldfont", ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
349 {"-italicfont", ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
350 {"-bw", ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
351 {"-borderwidth", ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
352 {"-sw", ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
353 {"-scrollbarwidth", ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
354 #endif
|
|
|
355 /* Arguments handled by GTK (and GNOME) internally. */
|
|
|
356 {"--g-fatal-warnings", ARG_FOR_GTK},
|
|
|
357 {"--gdk-debug", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
358 {"--gdk-no-debug", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
359 {"--gtk-debug", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
360 {"--gtk-no-debug", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
361 {"--gtk-module", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
362 {"--sync", ARG_FOR_GTK},
|
|
|
363 {"--display", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE|ARG_COMPAT_LONG},
|
|
|
364 {"--name", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE|ARG_COMPAT_LONG},
|
|
|
365 {"--class", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE|ARG_COMPAT_LONG},
|
|
|
366 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
367 {"--screen", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
368 {"--gxid-host", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
369 {"--gxid-port", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
370 #else /* these don't seem to exist anymore */
|
|
|
371 {"--no-xshm", ARG_FOR_GTK},
|
|
|
372 {"--xim-preedit", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
373 {"--xim-status", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
374 {"--gxid_host", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
375 {"--gxid_port", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
376 #endif
|
|
|
377 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME
|
|
|
378 {"--load-modules", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
379 {"--sm-client-id", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
380 {"--sm-config-prefix", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
381 {"--sm-disable", ARG_FOR_GTK},
|
|
|
382 {"--oaf-ior-fd", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
383 {"--oaf-activate-iid", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
384 {"--oaf-private", ARG_FOR_GTK},
|
|
|
385 {"--enable-sound", ARG_FOR_GTK},
|
|
|
386 {"--disable-sound", ARG_FOR_GTK},
|
|
|
387 {"--espeaker", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_HAS_VALUE},
|
|
|
388 {"-?", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_NEEDS_GUI},
|
|
|
389 {"--help", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_NEEDS_GUI|ARG_KEEP},
|
|
|
390 {"--usage", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_NEEDS_GUI},
|
|
|
391 # if 0 /* conflicts with Vim's own --version argument */
|
|
|
392 {"--version", ARG_FOR_GTK|ARG_NEEDS_GUI},
|
|
|
393 # endif
|
|
|
394 {"--disable-crash-dialog", ARG_FOR_GTK},
|
|
|
395 #endif
|
|
|
396 {NULL, 0}
|
|
|
397 };
|
|
|
398
|
|
|
399 static int gui_argc = 0;
|
|
|
400 static char **gui_argv = NULL;
|
|
|
401
|
|
|
402 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
403 static const char *role_argument = NULL;
|
|
|
404 #endif
|
|
|
405 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION)
|
|
|
406 static const char *restart_command = NULL;
|
|
|
407 #endif
|
|
|
408 static int found_iconic_arg = FALSE;
|
|
|
409
|
|
|
410 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME
|
|
|
411 /*
|
|
|
412 * Can't use Gnome if --socketid given
|
|
|
413 */
|
|
|
414 static int using_gnome = 0;
|
|
|
415 #else
|
|
|
416 # define using_gnome 0
|
|
|
417 #endif
|
|
|
418
|
|
|
419 /*
|
|
|
420 * Parse the GUI related command-line arguments. Any arguments used are
|
|
|
421 * deleted from argv, and *argc is decremented accordingly. This is called
|
|
|
422 * when vim is started, whether or not the GUI has been started.
|
|
|
423 */
|
|
|
424 void
|
|
|
425 gui_mch_prepare(int *argc, char **argv)
|
|
|
426 {
|
|
|
427 const cmdline_option_T *option;
|
|
|
428 int i = 0;
|
|
|
429 int len = 0;
|
|
|
430
|
|
|
431 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION)
|
|
|
432 /*
|
|
|
433 * Determine the command used to invoke Vim, to be passed as restart
|
|
|
434 * command to the session manager. If argv[0] contains any directory
|
|
|
435 * components try building an absolute path, otherwise leave it as is.
|
|
|
436 */
|
|
|
437 restart_command = argv[0];
|
|
|
438
|
|
|
439 if (strchr(argv[0], G_DIR_SEPARATOR) != NULL)
|
|
|
440 {
|
|
|
441 char_u buf[MAXPATHL];
|
|
|
442
|
|
|
443 if (mch_FullName((char_u *)argv[0], buf, (int)sizeof(buf), TRUE) == OK)
|
|
|
444 /* Tiny leak; doesn't matter, and usually we don't even get here */
|
|
|
445 restart_command = (char *)vim_strsave(buf);
|
|
|
446 }
|
|
|
447 #endif
|
|
|
448
|
|
|
449 /*
|
|
|
450 * Move all the entries in argv which are relevant to GTK+ and GNOME
|
|
|
451 * into gui_argv. Freed later in gui_mch_init().
|
|
|
452 */
|
|
|
453 gui_argc = 0;
|
|
|
454 gui_argv = (char **)alloc((unsigned)((*argc + 1) * sizeof(char *)));
|
|
|
455
|
|
|
456 g_return_if_fail(gui_argv != NULL);
|
|
|
457
|
|
|
458 gui_argv[gui_argc++] = argv[i++];
|
|
|
459
|
|
|
460 while (i < *argc)
|
|
|
461 {
|
|
|
462 /* Don't waste CPU cycles on non-option arguments. */
|
|
|
463 if (argv[i][0] != '-' && argv[i][0] != '+')
|
|
|
464 {
|
|
|
465 ++i;
|
|
|
466 continue;
|
|
|
467 }
|
|
|
468
|
|
|
469 /* Look for argv[i] in cmdline_options[] table. */
|
|
|
470 for (option = &cmdline_options[0]; option->name != NULL; ++option)
|
|
|
471 {
|
|
|
472 len = strlen(option->name);
|
|
|
473
|
|
|
474 if (strncmp(argv[i], option->name, len) == 0)
|
|
|
475 {
|
|
|
476 if (argv[i][len] == '\0')
|
|
|
477 break;
|
|
|
478 /* allow --foo=bar style */
|
|
|
479 if (argv[i][len] == '=' && (option->flags & ARG_HAS_VALUE))
|
|
|
480 break;
|
|
|
481 #ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG
|
|
|
482 /* darn, -nb has non-standard syntax */
|
|
|
483 if (vim_strchr((char_u *)":=", argv[i][len]) != NULL
|
|
|
484 && (option->flags & ARG_INDEX_MASK) == ARG_NETBEANS)
|
|
|
485 break;
|
|
|
486 #endif
|
|
|
487 }
|
|
|
488 else if ((option->flags & ARG_COMPAT_LONG)
|
|
|
489 && strcmp(argv[i], option->name + 1) == 0)
|
|
|
490 {
|
|
|
491 /* Replace the standard X arguments "-name" and "-display"
|
|
|
492 * with their GNU-style long option counterparts. */
|
|
|
493 argv[i] = (char *)option->name;
|
|
|
494 break;
|
|
|
495 }
|
|
|
496 }
|
|
|
497 if (option->name == NULL) /* no match */
|
|
|
498 {
|
|
|
499 ++i;
|
|
|
500 continue;
|
|
|
501 }
|
|
|
502
|
|
|
503 if (option->flags & ARG_FOR_GTK)
|
|
|
504 {
|
|
|
505 /* Move the argument into gui_argv, which
|
|
|
506 * will later be passed to gtk_init_check() */
|
|
|
507 gui_argv[gui_argc++] = argv[i];
|
|
|
508 }
|
|
|
509 else
|
|
|
510 {
|
|
|
511 char *value = NULL;
|
|
|
512
|
|
|
513 /* Extract the option's value if there is one.
|
|
|
514 * Accept both "--foo bar" and "--foo=bar" style. */
|
|
|
515 if (option->flags & ARG_HAS_VALUE)
|
|
|
516 {
|
|
|
517 if (argv[i][len] == '=')
|
|
|
518 value = &argv[i][len + 1];
|
|
|
519 else if (i + 1 < *argc && strcmp(argv[i + 1], "--") != 0)
|
|
|
520 value = argv[i + 1];
|
|
|
521 }
|
|
|
522
|
|
|
523 /* Check for options handled by Vim itself */
|
|
|
524 switch (option->flags & ARG_INDEX_MASK)
|
|
|
525 {
|
|
|
526 case ARG_REVERSE:
|
|
|
527 found_reverse_arg = TRUE;
|
|
|
528 break;
|
|
|
529 case ARG_NOREVERSE:
|
|
|
530 found_reverse_arg = FALSE;
|
|
|
531 break;
|
|
|
532 case ARG_FONT:
|
|
|
533 font_argument = value;
|
|
|
534 break;
|
|
|
535 case ARG_GEOMETRY:
|
|
|
536 if (value != NULL)
|
|
|
537 gui.geom = vim_strsave((char_u *)value);
|
|
|
538 break;
|
|
|
539 case ARG_BACKGROUND:
|
|
|
540 background_argument = value;
|
|
|
541 break;
|
|
|
542 case ARG_FOREGROUND:
|
|
|
543 foreground_argument = value;
|
|
|
544 break;
|
|
|
545 case ARG_ICONIC:
|
|
|
546 found_iconic_arg = TRUE;
|
|
|
547 break;
|
|
|
548 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
549 case ARG_ROLE:
|
|
|
550 role_argument = value; /* used later in gui_mch_open() */
|
|
|
551 break;
|
|
|
552 #endif
|
|
|
553 #ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG
|
|
|
554 case ARG_NETBEANS:
|
|
|
555 ++usingNetbeans;
|
|
|
556 gui.dofork = FALSE; /* don't fork() when starting GUI */
|
|
|
557 netbeansArg = argv[i];
|
|
|
558 break;
|
|
|
559 #endif
|
|
|
560 default:
|
|
|
561 break;
|
|
|
562 }
|
|
|
563 }
|
|
|
564
|
|
|
565 /* These arguments make gnome_program_init() print a message and exit.
|
|
|
566 * Must start the GUI for this, otherwise ":gui" will exit later! */
|
|
|
567 if (option->flags & ARG_NEEDS_GUI)
|
|
|
568 gui.starting = TRUE;
|
|
|
569
|
|
|
570 if (option->flags & ARG_KEEP)
|
|
|
571 ++i;
|
|
|
572 else
|
|
|
573 {
|
|
|
574 /* Remove the flag from the argument vector. */
|
|
|
575 if (--*argc > i)
|
|
|
576 {
|
|
|
577 int n_strip = 1;
|
|
|
578
|
|
|
579 /* Move the argument's value as well, if there is one. */
|
|
|
580 if ((option->flags & ARG_HAS_VALUE)
|
|
|
581 && argv[i][len] != '='
|
|
|
582 && strcmp(argv[i + 1], "--") != 0)
|
|
|
583 {
|
|
|
584 ++n_strip;
|
|
|
585 --*argc;
|
|
|
586 if (option->flags & ARG_FOR_GTK)
|
|
|
587 gui_argv[gui_argc++] = argv[i + 1];
|
|
|
588 }
|
|
|
589
|
|
|
590 if (*argc > i)
|
|
|
591 mch_memmove(&argv[i], &argv[i + n_strip],
|
|
|
592 (*argc - i) * sizeof(char *));
|
|
|
593 }
|
|
|
594 argv[*argc] = NULL;
|
|
|
595 }
|
|
|
596 }
|
|
|
597
|
|
|
598 gui_argv[gui_argc] = NULL;
|
|
|
599 }
|
|
|
600
|
|
359
|
601 #if defined(EXITFREE) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
602 void
|
|
|
603 gui_mch_free_all()
|
|
|
604 {
|
|
|
605 vim_free(gui_argv);
|
|
|
606 }
|
|
|
607 #endif
|
|
|
608
|
|
7
|
609 /*
|
|
|
610 * This should be maybe completely removed.
|
|
|
611 * Doesn't seem possible, since check_copy_area() relies on
|
|
|
612 * this information. --danielk
|
|
|
613 */
|
|
|
614 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
615 static gint
|
|
|
616 visibility_event(GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventVisibility *event, gpointer data)
|
|
|
617 {
|
|
|
618 gui.visibility = event->state;
|
|
|
619 /*
|
|
|
620 * When we do an gdk_window_copy_area(), and the window is partially
|
|
|
621 * obscured, we want to receive an event to tell us whether it worked
|
|
|
622 * or not.
|
|
|
623 */
|
|
|
624 if (gui.text_gc != NULL)
|
|
|
625 gdk_gc_set_exposures(gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
626 gui.visibility != GDK_VISIBILITY_UNOBSCURED);
|
|
|
627 return FALSE;
|
|
|
628 }
|
|
|
629
|
|
|
630 /*
|
|
|
631 * Redraw the corresponding portions of the screen.
|
|
|
632 */
|
|
|
633 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
634 static gint
|
|
|
635 expose_event(GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventExpose *event, gpointer data)
|
|
|
636 {
|
|
|
637 /* Skip this when the GUI isn't set up yet, will redraw later. */
|
|
|
638 if (gui.starting)
|
|
|
639 return FALSE;
|
|
|
640
|
|
|
641 out_flush(); /* make sure all output has been processed */
|
|
|
642 gui_redraw(event->area.x, event->area.y,
|
|
|
643 event->area.width, event->area.height);
|
|
|
644
|
|
|
645 /* Clear the border areas if needed */
|
|
|
646 if (event->area.x < FILL_X(0))
|
|
|
647 gdk_window_clear_area(gui.drawarea->window, 0, 0, FILL_X(0), 0);
|
|
|
648 if (event->area.y < FILL_Y(0))
|
|
|
649 gdk_window_clear_area(gui.drawarea->window, 0, 0, 0, FILL_Y(0));
|
|
|
650 if (event->area.x > FILL_X(Columns))
|
|
|
651 gdk_window_clear_area(gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
652 FILL_X((int)Columns), 0, 0, 0);
|
|
|
653 if (event->area.y > FILL_Y(Rows))
|
|
|
654 gdk_window_clear_area(gui.drawarea->window, 0, FILL_Y((int)Rows), 0, 0);
|
|
|
655
|
|
|
656 return FALSE;
|
|
|
657 }
|
|
|
658
|
|
|
659 #ifdef FEAT_CLIENTSERVER
|
|
|
660 /*
|
|
|
661 * Handle changes to the "Comm" property
|
|
|
662 */
|
|
|
663 /*ARGSUSED2*/
|
|
|
664 static gint
|
|
|
665 property_event(GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventProperty *event, gpointer data)
|
|
|
666 {
|
|
|
667 if (event->type == GDK_PROPERTY_NOTIFY
|
|
|
668 && event->state == (int)GDK_PROPERTY_NEW_VALUE
|
|
|
669 && GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(event->window) == commWindow
|
|
|
670 && GET_X_ATOM(event->atom) == commProperty)
|
|
|
671 {
|
|
|
672 XEvent xev;
|
|
|
673
|
|
|
674 /* Translate to XLib */
|
|
|
675 xev.xproperty.type = PropertyNotify;
|
|
|
676 xev.xproperty.atom = commProperty;
|
|
|
677 xev.xproperty.window = commWindow;
|
|
|
678 xev.xproperty.state = PropertyNewValue;
|
|
|
679 serverEventProc(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(widget->window), &xev);
|
|
|
680
|
|
|
681 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
682 gtk_main_quit();
|
|
|
683 }
|
|
|
684 return FALSE;
|
|
|
685 }
|
|
|
686 #endif
|
|
|
687
|
|
|
688
|
|
|
689 /****************************************************************************
|
|
|
690 * Focus handlers:
|
|
|
691 */
|
|
|
692
|
|
|
693
|
|
|
694 /*
|
|
|
695 * This is a simple state machine:
|
|
|
696 * BLINK_NONE not blinking at all
|
|
|
697 * BLINK_OFF blinking, cursor is not shown
|
|
|
698 * BLINK_ON blinking, cursor is shown
|
|
|
699 */
|
|
|
700
|
|
|
701 #define BLINK_NONE 0
|
|
|
702 #define BLINK_OFF 1
|
|
|
703 #define BLINK_ON 2
|
|
|
704
|
|
|
705 static int blink_state = BLINK_NONE;
|
|
|
706 static long_u blink_waittime = 700;
|
|
|
707 static long_u blink_ontime = 400;
|
|
|
708 static long_u blink_offtime = 250;
|
|
|
709 static guint blink_timer = 0;
|
|
|
710
|
|
|
711 void
|
|
|
712 gui_mch_set_blinking(long waittime, long on, long off)
|
|
|
713 {
|
|
|
714 blink_waittime = waittime;
|
|
|
715 blink_ontime = on;
|
|
|
716 blink_offtime = off;
|
|
|
717 }
|
|
|
718
|
|
|
719 /*
|
|
|
720 * Stop the cursor blinking. Show the cursor if it wasn't shown.
|
|
|
721 */
|
|
|
722 void
|
|
|
723 gui_mch_stop_blink(void)
|
|
|
724 {
|
|
|
725 if (blink_timer)
|
|
|
726 {
|
|
|
727 gtk_timeout_remove(blink_timer);
|
|
|
728 blink_timer = 0;
|
|
|
729 }
|
|
|
730 if (blink_state == BLINK_OFF)
|
|
|
731 gui_update_cursor(TRUE, FALSE);
|
|
|
732 blink_state = BLINK_NONE;
|
|
|
733 }
|
|
|
734
|
|
|
735 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
736 static gint
|
|
|
737 blink_cb(gpointer data)
|
|
|
738 {
|
|
|
739 if (blink_state == BLINK_ON)
|
|
|
740 {
|
|
|
741 gui_undraw_cursor();
|
|
|
742 blink_state = BLINK_OFF;
|
|
|
743 blink_timer = gtk_timeout_add((guint32)blink_offtime,
|
|
|
744 (GtkFunction) blink_cb, NULL);
|
|
|
745 }
|
|
|
746 else
|
|
|
747 {
|
|
|
748 gui_update_cursor(TRUE, FALSE);
|
|
|
749 blink_state = BLINK_ON;
|
|
|
750 blink_timer = gtk_timeout_add((guint32)blink_ontime,
|
|
|
751 (GtkFunction) blink_cb, NULL);
|
|
|
752 }
|
|
|
753
|
|
|
754 return FALSE; /* don't happen again */
|
|
|
755 }
|
|
|
756
|
|
|
757 /*
|
|
|
758 * Start the cursor blinking. If it was already blinking, this restarts the
|
|
|
759 * waiting time and shows the cursor.
|
|
|
760 */
|
|
|
761 void
|
|
|
762 gui_mch_start_blink(void)
|
|
|
763 {
|
|
|
764 if (blink_timer)
|
|
|
765 gtk_timeout_remove(blink_timer);
|
|
|
766 /* Only switch blinking on if none of the times is zero */
|
|
|
767 if (blink_waittime && blink_ontime && blink_offtime && gui.in_focus)
|
|
|
768 {
|
|
|
769 blink_timer = gtk_timeout_add((guint32)blink_waittime,
|
|
|
770 (GtkFunction) blink_cb, NULL);
|
|
|
771 blink_state = BLINK_ON;
|
|
|
772 gui_update_cursor(TRUE, FALSE);
|
|
|
773 }
|
|
|
774 }
|
|
|
775
|
|
|
776 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
777 static gint
|
|
|
778 enter_notify_event(GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventCrossing *event, gpointer data)
|
|
|
779 {
|
|
|
780 if (blink_state == BLINK_NONE)
|
|
|
781 gui_mch_start_blink();
|
|
|
782
|
|
|
783 /* make sure keyboard input goes there */
|
|
|
784 if (gtk_socket_id == 0 || !GTK_WIDGET_HAS_FOCUS(gui.drawarea))
|
|
|
785 gtk_widget_grab_focus(gui.drawarea);
|
|
|
786
|
|
|
787 return FALSE;
|
|
|
788 }
|
|
|
789
|
|
|
790 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
791 static gint
|
|
|
792 leave_notify_event(GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventCrossing *event, gpointer data)
|
|
|
793 {
|
|
|
794 if (blink_state != BLINK_NONE)
|
|
|
795 gui_mch_stop_blink();
|
|
|
796
|
|
|
797 return FALSE;
|
|
|
798 }
|
|
|
799
|
|
|
800 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
801 static gint
|
|
|
802 focus_in_event(GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventFocus *event, gpointer data)
|
|
|
803 {
|
|
|
804 gui_focus_change(TRUE);
|
|
|
805
|
|
|
806 if (blink_state == BLINK_NONE)
|
|
|
807 gui_mch_start_blink();
|
|
|
808
|
|
791
|
809 /* make sure keyboard input goes to the draw area (if this is focus for a window) */
|
|
|
810 if (widget != gui.drawarea)
|
|
|
811 gtk_widget_grab_focus(gui.drawarea);
|
|
7
|
812
|
|
|
813 return TRUE;
|
|
|
814 }
|
|
|
815
|
|
|
816 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
817 static gint
|
|
|
818 focus_out_event(GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventFocus *event, gpointer data)
|
|
|
819 {
|
|
|
820 gui_focus_change(FALSE);
|
|
|
821
|
|
|
822 if (blink_state != BLINK_NONE)
|
|
|
823 gui_mch_stop_blink();
|
|
|
824
|
|
|
825 return TRUE;
|
|
|
826 }
|
|
|
827
|
|
|
828
|
|
|
829 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
830 /*
|
|
|
831 * Translate a GDK key value to UTF-8 independently of the current locale.
|
|
|
832 * The output is written to string, which must have room for at least 6 bytes
|
|
|
833 * plus the NUL terminator. Returns the length in bytes.
|
|
|
834 *
|
|
|
835 * This function is used in the GTK+ 2 GUI only. The GTK+ 1 code makes use
|
|
|
836 * of GdkEventKey::string instead. But event->string is evil; see here why:
|
|
|
837 * http://developer.gnome.org/doc/API/2.0/gdk/gdk-Event-Structures.html#GdkEventKey
|
|
|
838 */
|
|
|
839 static int
|
|
|
840 keyval_to_string(unsigned int keyval, unsigned int state, char_u *string)
|
|
|
841 {
|
|
|
842 int len;
|
|
|
843 guint32 uc;
|
|
|
844
|
|
|
845 uc = gdk_keyval_to_unicode(keyval);
|
|
|
846 if (uc != 0)
|
|
|
847 {
|
|
|
848 /* Check for CTRL-foo */
|
|
|
849 if ((state & GDK_CONTROL_MASK) && uc >= 0x20 && uc < 0x80)
|
|
|
850 {
|
|
|
851 /* These mappings look arbitrary at the first glance, but in fact
|
|
|
852 * resemble quite exactly the behaviour of the GTK+ 1.2 GUI on my
|
|
|
853 * machine. The only difference is BS vs. DEL for CTRL-8 (makes
|
|
|
854 * more sense and is consistent with usual terminal behaviour). */
|
|
|
855 if (uc >= '@')
|
|
|
856 string[0] = uc & 0x1F;
|
|
|
857 else if (uc == '2')
|
|
|
858 string[0] = NUL;
|
|
|
859 else if (uc >= '3' && uc <= '7')
|
|
|
860 string[0] = uc ^ 0x28;
|
|
|
861 else if (uc == '8')
|
|
|
862 string[0] = BS;
|
|
|
863 else if (uc == '?')
|
|
|
864 string[0] = DEL;
|
|
|
865 else
|
|
|
866 string[0] = uc;
|
|
|
867 len = 1;
|
|
|
868 }
|
|
|
869 else
|
|
|
870 {
|
|
|
871 /* Translate a normal key to UTF-8. This doesn't work for dead
|
|
|
872 * keys of course, you _have_ to use an input method for that. */
|
|
|
873 len = utf_char2bytes((int)uc, string);
|
|
|
874 }
|
|
|
875 }
|
|
|
876 else
|
|
|
877 {
|
|
|
878 /* Translate keys which are represented by ASCII control codes in Vim.
|
|
|
879 * There are only a few of those; most control keys are translated to
|
|
|
880 * special terminal-like control sequences. */
|
|
|
881 len = 1;
|
|
|
882 switch (keyval)
|
|
|
883 {
|
|
|
884 case GDK_Tab: case GDK_KP_Tab: case GDK_ISO_Left_Tab:
|
|
|
885 string[0] = TAB;
|
|
|
886 break;
|
|
|
887 case GDK_Linefeed:
|
|
|
888 string[0] = NL;
|
|
|
889 break;
|
|
|
890 case GDK_Return: case GDK_ISO_Enter: case GDK_3270_Enter:
|
|
|
891 string[0] = CAR;
|
|
|
892 break;
|
|
|
893 case GDK_Escape:
|
|
|
894 string[0] = ESC;
|
|
|
895 break;
|
|
|
896 default:
|
|
|
897 len = 0;
|
|
|
898 break;
|
|
|
899 }
|
|
|
900 }
|
|
|
901 string[len] = NUL;
|
|
|
902
|
|
|
903 return len;
|
|
|
904 }
|
|
|
905 #endif /* HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
906
|
|
179
|
907 static int
|
|
|
908 modifiers_gdk2vim(guint state)
|
|
|
909 {
|
|
|
910 int modifiers = 0;
|
|
|
911
|
|
|
912 if (state & GDK_SHIFT_MASK)
|
|
|
913 modifiers |= MOD_MASK_SHIFT;
|
|
|
914 if (state & GDK_CONTROL_MASK)
|
|
|
915 modifiers |= MOD_MASK_CTRL;
|
|
|
916 if (state & GDK_MOD1_MASK)
|
|
|
917 modifiers |= MOD_MASK_ALT;
|
|
|
918 if (state & GDK_MOD4_MASK)
|
|
|
919 modifiers |= MOD_MASK_META;
|
|
|
920
|
|
|
921 return modifiers;
|
|
|
922 }
|
|
|
923
|
|
|
924 static int
|
|
|
925 modifiers_gdk2mouse(guint state)
|
|
|
926 {
|
|
|
927 int modifiers = 0;
|
|
|
928
|
|
|
929 if (state & GDK_SHIFT_MASK)
|
|
|
930 modifiers |= MOUSE_SHIFT;
|
|
|
931 if (state & GDK_CONTROL_MASK)
|
|
|
932 modifiers |= MOUSE_CTRL;
|
|
|
933 if (state & GDK_MOD1_MASK)
|
|
|
934 modifiers |= MOUSE_ALT;
|
|
|
935
|
|
|
936 return modifiers;
|
|
|
937 }
|
|
|
938
|
|
7
|
939 /*
|
|
|
940 * Main keyboard handler:
|
|
|
941 */
|
|
|
942 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
943 static gint
|
|
|
944 key_press_event(GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventKey *event, gpointer data)
|
|
|
945 {
|
|
|
946 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
947 /* 256 bytes is way over the top, but for safety let's reduce it only
|
|
|
948 * for GTK+ 2 where we know for sure how large the string might get.
|
|
|
949 * (That is, up to 6 bytes + NUL + CSI escapes + safety measure.) */
|
|
|
950 char_u string[32], string2[32];
|
|
|
951 #else
|
|
|
952 char_u string[256], string2[256];
|
|
|
953 #endif
|
|
|
954 guint key_sym;
|
|
|
955 int len;
|
|
|
956 int i;
|
|
|
957 int modifiers;
|
|
|
958 int key;
|
|
|
959 guint state;
|
|
|
960 char_u *s, *d;
|
|
|
961
|
|
|
962 key_sym = event->keyval;
|
|
|
963 state = event->state;
|
|
|
964 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2 /* deprecated */
|
|
|
965 len = event->length;
|
|
|
966 g_assert(len <= sizeof(string));
|
|
|
967 #endif
|
|
|
968
|
|
|
969 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
970 /*
|
|
|
971 * It appears as if we always want to consume a key-press (there currently
|
|
|
972 * aren't any 'return FALSE's), so we always do this: when running in a
|
|
|
973 * GtkPlug and not a window, we must prevent emission of the key_press
|
|
|
974 * EVENT from continuing (which is 'beyond' the level of stopping mere
|
|
|
975 * signals by returning FALSE), otherwise things like tab/cursor-keys are
|
|
|
976 * processed by the GtkPlug default handler, which moves input focus away
|
|
|
977 * from us!
|
|
|
978 * Note: This should no longer be necessary with GTK+ 2.
|
|
|
979 */
|
|
|
980 if (gtk_socket_id != 0)
|
|
|
981 gtk_signal_emit_stop_by_name(GTK_OBJECT(widget), "key_press_event");
|
|
|
982 #endif
|
|
|
983
|
|
|
984 #ifdef FEAT_XIM
|
|
|
985 if (xim_queue_key_press_event(event, TRUE))
|
|
|
986 return TRUE;
|
|
|
987 #endif
|
|
|
988
|
|
|
989 #ifdef FEAT_HANGULIN
|
|
|
990 if (key_sym == GDK_space && (state & GDK_SHIFT_MASK))
|
|
|
991 {
|
|
|
992 hangul_input_state_toggle();
|
|
|
993 return TRUE;
|
|
|
994 }
|
|
|
995 #endif
|
|
|
996
|
|
|
997 #ifdef SunXK_F36
|
|
|
998 /*
|
|
|
999 * These keys have bogus lookup strings, and trapping them here is
|
|
|
1000 * easier than trying to XRebindKeysym() on them with every possible
|
|
|
1001 * combination of modifiers.
|
|
|
1002 */
|
|
|
1003 if (key_sym == SunXK_F36 || key_sym == SunXK_F37)
|
|
|
1004 len = 0;
|
|
|
1005 else
|
|
|
1006 #endif
|
|
|
1007 {
|
|
|
1008 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
1009 len = keyval_to_string(key_sym, state, string2);
|
|
|
1010
|
|
|
1011 /* Careful: convert_input() doesn't handle the NUL character.
|
|
|
1012 * No need to convert pure ASCII anyway, thus the len > 1 check. */
|
|
|
1013 if (len > 1 && input_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
1014 len = convert_input(string2, len, sizeof(string2));
|
|
|
1015
|
|
|
1016 s = string2;
|
|
|
1017 #else
|
|
|
1018 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
1019 if (input_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
1020 {
|
|
|
1021 mch_memmove(string2, event->string, len);
|
|
|
1022 len = convert_input(string2, len, sizeof(string2));
|
|
|
1023 s = string2;
|
|
|
1024 }
|
|
|
1025 else
|
|
|
1026 # endif
|
|
|
1027 s = (char_u *)event->string;
|
|
|
1028 #endif
|
|
|
1029
|
|
|
1030 d = string;
|
|
|
1031 for (i = 0; i < len; ++i)
|
|
|
1032 {
|
|
|
1033 *d++ = s[i];
|
|
|
1034 if (d[-1] == CSI && d + 2 < string + sizeof(string))
|
|
|
1035 {
|
|
|
1036 /* Turn CSI into K_CSI. */
|
|
|
1037 *d++ = KS_EXTRA;
|
|
|
1038 *d++ = (int)KE_CSI;
|
|
|
1039 }
|
|
|
1040 }
|
|
|
1041 len = d - string;
|
|
|
1042 }
|
|
|
1043
|
|
|
1044 /* Shift-Tab results in Left_Tab, but we want <S-Tab> */
|
|
|
1045 if (key_sym == GDK_ISO_Left_Tab)
|
|
|
1046 {
|
|
|
1047 key_sym = GDK_Tab;
|
|
|
1048 state |= GDK_SHIFT_MASK;
|
|
|
1049 }
|
|
|
1050
|
|
|
1051 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2 /* for GTK+ 2, we handle this in keyval_to_string() */
|
|
|
1052 if ((key_sym == GDK_2 || key_sym == GDK_at) && (state & GDK_CONTROL_MASK))
|
|
|
1053 {
|
|
|
1054 string[0] = NUL; /* CTRL-2 and CTRL-@ is NUL */
|
|
|
1055 len = 1;
|
|
|
1056 }
|
|
|
1057 else if (len == 0 && (key_sym == GDK_space || key_sym == GDK_Tab))
|
|
|
1058 {
|
|
|
1059 /* When there are modifiers, these keys get zero length; we need the
|
|
|
1060 * original key here to be able to add a modifier below. */
|
|
|
1061 string[0] = (key_sym & 0xff);
|
|
|
1062 len = 1;
|
|
|
1063 }
|
|
|
1064 #endif
|
|
|
1065
|
|
|
1066 #ifdef FEAT_MENU
|
|
|
1067 /* If there is a menu and 'wak' is "yes", or 'wak' is "menu" and the key
|
|
|
1068 * is a menu shortcut, we ignore everything with the ALT modifier. */
|
|
|
1069 if ((state & GDK_MOD1_MASK)
|
|
|
1070 && gui.menu_is_active
|
|
|
1071 && (*p_wak == 'y'
|
|
|
1072 || (*p_wak == 'm'
|
|
|
1073 && len == 1
|
|
|
1074 && gui_is_menu_shortcut(string[0]))))
|
|
|
1075 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
1076 /* For GTK2 we return false to signify that we haven't handled the
|
|
|
1077 * keypress, so that gtk will handle the mnemonic or accelerator. */
|
|
|
1078 return FALSE;
|
|
|
1079 # else
|
|
|
1080 return TRUE;
|
|
|
1081 # endif
|
|
|
1082 #endif
|
|
|
1083
|
|
|
1084 /* Check for Alt/Meta key (Mod1Mask), but not for a BS, DEL or character
|
|
|
1085 * that already has the 8th bit set.
|
|
|
1086 * Don't do this for <S-M-Tab>, that should become K_S_TAB with ALT.
|
|
|
1087 * Don't do this for double-byte encodings, it turns the char into a lead
|
|
|
1088 * byte. */
|
|
|
1089 if (len == 1
|
|
|
1090 && (state & GDK_MOD1_MASK)
|
|
|
1091 && !(key_sym == GDK_BackSpace || key_sym == GDK_Delete)
|
|
|
1092 && (string[0] & 0x80) == 0
|
|
|
1093 && !(key_sym == GDK_Tab && (state & GDK_SHIFT_MASK))
|
|
|
1094 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
1095 && !enc_dbcs
|
|
|
1096 #endif
|
|
|
1097 )
|
|
|
1098 {
|
|
|
1099 string[0] |= 0x80;
|
|
|
1100 state &= ~GDK_MOD1_MASK; /* don't use it again */
|
|
|
1101 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
1102 if (enc_utf8) /* convert to utf-8 */
|
|
|
1103 {
|
|
|
1104 string[1] = string[0] & 0xbf;
|
|
|
1105 string[0] = ((unsigned)string[0] >> 6) + 0xc0;
|
|
|
1106 if (string[1] == CSI)
|
|
|
1107 {
|
|
|
1108 string[2] = KS_EXTRA;
|
|
|
1109 string[3] = (int)KE_CSI;
|
|
|
1110 len = 4;
|
|
|
1111 }
|
|
|
1112 else
|
|
|
1113 len = 2;
|
|
|
1114 }
|
|
|
1115 #endif
|
|
|
1116 }
|
|
|
1117
|
|
|
1118 /* Check for special keys. Also do this when len == 1 (key has an ASCII
|
|
|
1119 * value) to detect backspace, delete and keypad keys. */
|
|
|
1120 if (len == 0 || len == 1)
|
|
|
1121 {
|
|
|
1122 for (i = 0; special_keys[i].key_sym != 0; i++)
|
|
|
1123 {
|
|
|
1124 if (special_keys[i].key_sym == key_sym)
|
|
|
1125 {
|
|
|
1126 string[0] = CSI;
|
|
|
1127 string[1] = special_keys[i].code0;
|
|
|
1128 string[2] = special_keys[i].code1;
|
|
|
1129 len = -3;
|
|
|
1130 break;
|
|
|
1131 }
|
|
|
1132 }
|
|
|
1133 }
|
|
|
1134
|
|
|
1135 if (len == 0) /* Unrecognized key */
|
|
|
1136 return TRUE;
|
|
|
1137
|
|
|
1138 #if defined(FEAT_XIM) && defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK) && !defined(HAVE_GTK2)
|
|
|
1139 /* Cancel or type backspace. For GTK2, im_commit_cb() does the same. */
|
|
|
1140 preedit_start_col = MAXCOL;
|
|
|
1141 xim_changed_while_preediting = TRUE;
|
|
|
1142 #endif
|
|
|
1143
|
|
|
1144 /* Special keys (and a few others) may have modifiers. Also when using a
|
|
|
1145 * double-byte encoding (can't set the 8th bit). */
|
|
|
1146 if (len == -3 || key_sym == GDK_space || key_sym == GDK_Tab
|
|
|
1147 || key_sym == GDK_Return || key_sym == GDK_Linefeed
|
|
|
1148 || key_sym == GDK_Escape || key_sym == GDK_KP_Tab
|
|
|
1149 || key_sym == GDK_ISO_Enter || key_sym == GDK_3270_Enter
|
|
|
1150 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
1151 || (enc_dbcs && len == 1 && (state & GDK_MOD1_MASK))
|
|
|
1152 #endif
|
|
|
1153 )
|
|
|
1154 {
|
|
179
|
1155 modifiers = modifiers_gdk2vim(state);
|
|
7
|
1156
|
|
|
1157 /*
|
|
|
1158 * For some keys a shift modifier is translated into another key
|
|
|
1159 * code.
|
|
|
1160 */
|
|
|
1161 if (len == -3)
|
|
|
1162 key = TO_SPECIAL(string[1], string[2]);
|
|
|
1163 else
|
|
|
1164 key = string[0];
|
|
|
1165
|
|
|
1166 key = simplify_key(key, &modifiers);
|
|
|
1167 if (key == CSI)
|
|
|
1168 key = K_CSI;
|
|
|
1169 if (IS_SPECIAL(key))
|
|
|
1170 {
|
|
|
1171 string[0] = CSI;
|
|
|
1172 string[1] = K_SECOND(key);
|
|
|
1173 string[2] = K_THIRD(key);
|
|
|
1174 len = 3;
|
|
|
1175 }
|
|
|
1176 else
|
|
|
1177 {
|
|
|
1178 string[0] = key;
|
|
|
1179 len = 1;
|
|
|
1180 }
|
|
|
1181
|
|
|
1182 if (modifiers != 0)
|
|
|
1183 {
|
|
|
1184 string2[0] = CSI;
|
|
|
1185 string2[1] = KS_MODIFIER;
|
|
|
1186 string2[2] = modifiers;
|
|
|
1187 add_to_input_buf(string2, 3);
|
|
|
1188 }
|
|
|
1189 }
|
|
|
1190
|
|
|
1191 if (len == 1 && ((string[0] == Ctrl_C && ctrl_c_interrupts)
|
|
|
1192 || (string[0] == intr_char && intr_char != Ctrl_C)))
|
|
|
1193 {
|
|
|
1194 trash_input_buf();
|
|
|
1195 got_int = TRUE;
|
|
|
1196 }
|
|
|
1197
|
|
|
1198 add_to_input_buf(string, len);
|
|
|
1199
|
|
|
1200 /* blank out the pointer if necessary */
|
|
|
1201 if (p_mh)
|
|
|
1202 gui_mch_mousehide(TRUE);
|
|
|
1203
|
|
|
1204 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
1205 gtk_main_quit();
|
|
|
1206
|
|
|
1207 return TRUE;
|
|
|
1208 }
|
|
|
1209
|
|
|
1210 #if defined(FEAT_XIM) && defined(HAVE_GTK2)
|
|
|
1211 /*ARGSUSED0*/
|
|
|
1212 static gboolean
|
|
|
1213 key_release_event(GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventKey *event, gpointer data)
|
|
|
1214 {
|
|
|
1215 /*
|
|
|
1216 * GTK+ 2 input methods may do fancy stuff on key release events too.
|
|
|
1217 * With the default IM for instance, you can enter any UCS code point
|
|
|
1218 * by holding down CTRL-SHIFT and typing hexadecimal digits.
|
|
|
1219 */
|
|
|
1220 return xim_queue_key_press_event(event, FALSE);
|
|
|
1221 }
|
|
|
1222 #endif
|
|
|
1223
|
|
|
1224
|
|
|
1225 /****************************************************************************
|
|
|
1226 * Selection handlers:
|
|
|
1227 */
|
|
|
1228
|
|
|
1229 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
1230 static gint
|
|
|
1231 selection_clear_event(GtkWidget *widget,
|
|
|
1232 GdkEventSelection *event,
|
|
|
1233 gpointer user_data)
|
|
|
1234 {
|
|
|
1235 if (event->selection == clip_plus.gtk_sel_atom)
|
|
|
1236 clip_lose_selection(&clip_plus);
|
|
|
1237 else
|
|
|
1238 clip_lose_selection(&clip_star);
|
|
|
1239
|
|
|
1240 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
1241 gtk_main_quit();
|
|
|
1242
|
|
|
1243 return TRUE;
|
|
|
1244 }
|
|
|
1245
|
|
|
1246 #define RS_NONE 0 /* selection_received_cb() not called yet */
|
|
|
1247 #define RS_OK 1 /* selection_received_cb() called and OK */
|
|
|
1248 #define RS_FAIL 2 /* selection_received_cb() called and failed */
|
|
|
1249 static int received_selection = RS_NONE;
|
|
|
1250
|
|
|
1251 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
1252 static void
|
|
|
1253 selection_received_cb(GtkWidget *widget,
|
|
|
1254 GtkSelectionData *data,
|
|
|
1255 guint time_,
|
|
|
1256 gpointer user_data)
|
|
|
1257 {
|
|
|
1258 VimClipboard *cbd;
|
|
|
1259 char_u *text;
|
|
|
1260 char_u *tmpbuf = NULL;
|
|
|
1261 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
1262 guchar *tmpbuf_utf8 = NULL;
|
|
|
1263 #endif
|
|
|
1264 int len;
|
|
|
1265 int motion_type;
|
|
|
1266
|
|
|
1267 if (data->selection == clip_plus.gtk_sel_atom)
|
|
|
1268 cbd = &clip_plus;
|
|
|
1269 else
|
|
|
1270 cbd = &clip_star;
|
|
|
1271
|
|
|
1272 text = (char_u *)data->data;
|
|
|
1273 len = data->length;
|
|
|
1274 motion_type = MCHAR;
|
|
|
1275
|
|
|
1276 if (text == NULL || len <= 0)
|
|
|
1277 {
|
|
|
1278 received_selection = RS_FAIL;
|
|
|
1279 /* clip_free_selection(cbd); ??? */
|
|
|
1280
|
|
|
1281 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
1282 gtk_main_quit();
|
|
|
1283
|
|
|
1284 return;
|
|
|
1285 }
|
|
|
1286
|
|
|
1287 if (data->type == vim_atom)
|
|
|
1288 {
|
|
|
1289 motion_type = *text++;
|
|
|
1290 --len;
|
|
|
1291 }
|
|
|
1292
|
|
|
1293 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
1294 else if (data->type == vimenc_atom)
|
|
|
1295 {
|
|
|
1296 char_u *enc;
|
|
|
1297 vimconv_T conv;
|
|
|
1298
|
|
|
1299 motion_type = *text++;
|
|
|
1300 --len;
|
|
|
1301
|
|
|
1302 enc = text;
|
|
|
1303 text += STRLEN(text) + 1;
|
|
|
1304 len -= text - enc;
|
|
|
1305
|
|
|
1306 /* If the encoding of the text is different from 'encoding', attempt
|
|
|
1307 * converting it. */
|
|
|
1308 conv.vc_type = CONV_NONE;
|
|
|
1309 convert_setup(&conv, enc, p_enc);
|
|
|
1310 if (conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
1311 {
|
|
|
1312 tmpbuf = string_convert(&conv, text, &len);
|
|
|
1313 if (tmpbuf != NULL)
|
|
|
1314 text = tmpbuf;
|
|
|
1315 convert_setup(&conv, NULL, NULL);
|
|
|
1316 }
|
|
|
1317 }
|
|
|
1318 #endif
|
|
|
1319
|
|
|
1320 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
1321 /* gtk_selection_data_get_text() handles all the nasty details
|
|
|
1322 * and targets and encodings etc. This rocks so hard. */
|
|
|
1323 else
|
|
|
1324 {
|
|
|
1325 tmpbuf_utf8 = gtk_selection_data_get_text(data);
|
|
|
1326 if (tmpbuf_utf8 != NULL)
|
|
|
1327 {
|
|
|
1328 len = STRLEN(tmpbuf_utf8);
|
|
|
1329 if (input_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
1330 {
|
|
|
1331 tmpbuf = string_convert(&input_conv, tmpbuf_utf8, &len);
|
|
|
1332 if (tmpbuf != NULL)
|
|
|
1333 text = tmpbuf;
|
|
|
1334 }
|
|
|
1335 else
|
|
|
1336 text = tmpbuf_utf8;
|
|
|
1337 }
|
|
|
1338 }
|
|
|
1339 #else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
1340 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
1341 else if (data->type == utf8_string_atom)
|
|
|
1342 {
|
|
|
1343 vimconv_T conv;
|
|
|
1344
|
|
|
1345 conv.vc_type = CONV_NONE;
|
|
|
1346 convert_setup(&conv, (char_u *)"utf-8", p_enc);
|
|
|
1347
|
|
|
1348 if (conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
1349 {
|
|
|
1350 tmpbuf = string_convert(&conv, text, &len);
|
|
|
1351 convert_setup(&conv, NULL, NULL);
|
|
|
1352 }
|
|
|
1353 if (tmpbuf != NULL)
|
|
|
1354 text = tmpbuf;
|
|
|
1355 }
|
|
|
1356 # endif
|
|
|
1357 else if (data->type == compound_text_atom || data->type == text_atom)
|
|
|
1358 {
|
|
|
1359 char **list = NULL;
|
|
|
1360 int count;
|
|
|
1361 int i;
|
|
|
1362 unsigned tmplen = 0;
|
|
|
1363
|
|
|
1364 count = gdk_text_property_to_text_list(data->type, data->format,
|
|
|
1365 data->data, data->length,
|
|
|
1366 &list);
|
|
|
1367 for (i = 0; i < count; ++i)
|
|
|
1368 tmplen += strlen(list[i]);
|
|
|
1369
|
|
|
1370 tmpbuf = alloc(tmplen + 1);
|
|
|
1371 if (tmpbuf != NULL)
|
|
|
1372 {
|
|
|
1373 tmpbuf[0] = NUL;
|
|
|
1374 for (i = 0; i < count; ++i)
|
|
|
1375 STRCAT(tmpbuf, list[i]);
|
|
|
1376 text = tmpbuf;
|
|
|
1377 len = tmplen;
|
|
|
1378 }
|
|
|
1379
|
|
|
1380 if (list != NULL)
|
|
|
1381 gdk_free_text_list(list);
|
|
|
1382 }
|
|
|
1383 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
1384
|
|
|
1385 clip_yank_selection(motion_type, text, (long)len, cbd);
|
|
|
1386 received_selection = RS_OK;
|
|
|
1387 vim_free(tmpbuf);
|
|
|
1388 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
1389 g_free(tmpbuf_utf8);
|
|
|
1390 #endif
|
|
|
1391
|
|
|
1392 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
1393 gtk_main_quit();
|
|
|
1394 }
|
|
|
1395
|
|
|
1396 /*
|
|
|
1397 * Prepare our selection data for passing it to the external selection
|
|
|
1398 * client.
|
|
|
1399 */
|
|
|
1400 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
1401 static void
|
|
|
1402 selection_get_cb(GtkWidget *widget,
|
|
|
1403 GtkSelectionData *selection_data,
|
|
|
1404 guint info,
|
|
|
1405 guint time_,
|
|
|
1406 gpointer user_data)
|
|
|
1407 {
|
|
|
1408 char_u *string;
|
|
|
1409 char_u *tmpbuf;
|
|
|
1410 long_u tmplen;
|
|
|
1411 int length;
|
|
|
1412 int motion_type;
|
|
|
1413 GdkAtom type;
|
|
|
1414 VimClipboard *cbd;
|
|
|
1415
|
|
|
1416 if (selection_data->selection == clip_plus.gtk_sel_atom)
|
|
|
1417 cbd = &clip_plus;
|
|
|
1418 else
|
|
|
1419 cbd = &clip_star;
|
|
|
1420
|
|
|
1421 if (!cbd->owned)
|
|
|
1422 return; /* Shouldn't ever happen */
|
|
|
1423
|
|
|
1424 if (info != (guint)TARGET_STRING
|
|
|
1425 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
1426 && info != (guint)TARGET_UTF8_STRING
|
|
|
1427 && info != (guint)TARGET_VIMENC
|
|
|
1428 #endif
|
|
|
1429 && info != (guint)TARGET_VIM
|
|
|
1430 && info != (guint)TARGET_COMPOUND_TEXT
|
|
|
1431 && info != (guint)TARGET_TEXT)
|
|
|
1432 return;
|
|
|
1433
|
|
|
1434 /* get the selection from the '*'/'+' register */
|
|
|
1435 clip_get_selection(cbd);
|
|
|
1436
|
|
|
1437 motion_type = clip_convert_selection(&string, &tmplen, cbd);
|
|
|
1438 if (motion_type < 0 || string == NULL)
|
|
|
1439 return;
|
|
|
1440 /* Due to int arguments we can't handle more than G_MAXINT. Also
|
|
|
1441 * reserve one extra byte for NUL or the motion type; just in case.
|
|
|
1442 * (Not that pasting 2G of text is ever going to work, but... ;-) */
|
|
|
1443 length = MIN(tmplen, (long_u)(G_MAXINT - 1));
|
|
|
1444
|
|
|
1445 if (info == (guint)TARGET_VIM)
|
|
|
1446 {
|
|
|
1447 tmpbuf = alloc((unsigned)length + 1);
|
|
|
1448 if (tmpbuf != NULL)
|
|
|
1449 {
|
|
|
1450 tmpbuf[0] = motion_type;
|
|
|
1451 mch_memmove(tmpbuf + 1, string, (size_t)length);
|
|
|
1452 }
|
|
|
1453 /* For our own format, the first byte contains the motion type */
|
|
|
1454 ++length;
|
|
|
1455 vim_free(string);
|
|
|
1456 string = tmpbuf;
|
|
|
1457 type = vim_atom;
|
|
|
1458 }
|
|
|
1459
|
|
|
1460 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
1461 else if (info == (guint)TARGET_VIMENC)
|
|
|
1462 {
|
|
|
1463 int l = STRLEN(p_enc);
|
|
|
1464
|
|
|
1465 /* contents: motion_type 'encoding' NUL text */
|
|
|
1466 tmpbuf = alloc((unsigned)length + l + 2);
|
|
|
1467 if (tmpbuf != NULL)
|
|
|
1468 {
|
|
|
1469 tmpbuf[0] = motion_type;
|
|
|
1470 STRCPY(tmpbuf + 1, p_enc);
|
|
|
1471 mch_memmove(tmpbuf + l + 2, string, (size_t)length);
|
|
|
1472 }
|
|
|
1473 length += l + 2;
|
|
|
1474 vim_free(string);
|
|
|
1475 string = tmpbuf;
|
|
|
1476 type = vimenc_atom;
|
|
|
1477 }
|
|
|
1478 #endif
|
|
|
1479
|
|
|
1480 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
1481 /* gtk_selection_data_set_text() handles everything for us. This is
|
|
|
1482 * so easy and simple and cool, it'd be insane not to use it. */
|
|
|
1483 else
|
|
|
1484 {
|
|
|
1485 if (output_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
1486 {
|
|
|
1487 tmpbuf = string_convert(&output_conv, string, &length);
|
|
|
1488 vim_free(string);
|
|
|
1489 if (tmpbuf == NULL)
|
|
|
1490 return;
|
|
|
1491 string = tmpbuf;
|
|
|
1492 }
|
|
|
1493 /* Validate the string to avoid runtime warnings */
|
|
|
1494 if (g_utf8_validate((const char *)string, (gssize)length, NULL))
|
|
|
1495 {
|
|
|
1496 gtk_selection_data_set_text(selection_data,
|
|
|
1497 (const char *)string, length);
|
|
|
1498 }
|
|
|
1499 vim_free(string);
|
|
|
1500 return;
|
|
|
1501 }
|
|
|
1502 #else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
1503 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
1504 else if (info == (guint)TARGET_UTF8_STRING)
|
|
|
1505 {
|
|
|
1506 vimconv_T conv;
|
|
|
1507
|
|
|
1508 conv.vc_type = CONV_NONE;
|
|
|
1509 convert_setup(&conv, p_enc, (char_u *)"utf-8");
|
|
|
1510
|
|
|
1511 if (conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
1512 {
|
|
|
1513 tmpbuf = string_convert(&conv, string, &length);
|
|
|
1514 convert_setup(&conv, NULL, NULL);
|
|
|
1515 vim_free(string);
|
|
|
1516 string = tmpbuf;
|
|
|
1517 }
|
|
|
1518 type = utf8_string_atom;
|
|
|
1519 }
|
|
|
1520 # endif
|
|
|
1521 else if (info == (guint)TARGET_COMPOUND_TEXT
|
|
|
1522 || info == (guint)TARGET_TEXT)
|
|
|
1523 {
|
|
|
1524 int format;
|
|
|
1525
|
|
|
1526 /* Copy the string to ensure NUL-termination */
|
|
|
1527 tmpbuf = vim_strnsave(string, length);
|
|
|
1528 vim_free(string);
|
|
|
1529 if (tmpbuf != NULL)
|
|
|
1530 {
|
|
|
1531 gdk_string_to_compound_text((const char *)tmpbuf,
|
|
|
1532 &type, &format, &string, &length);
|
|
|
1533 vim_free(tmpbuf);
|
|
|
1534 selection_data->type = type;
|
|
|
1535 selection_data->format = format;
|
|
|
1536 gtk_selection_data_set(selection_data, type, format, string, length);
|
|
|
1537 gdk_free_compound_text(string);
|
|
|
1538 }
|
|
|
1539 return;
|
|
|
1540 }
|
|
|
1541 else
|
|
|
1542 {
|
|
|
1543 type = GDK_TARGET_STRING;
|
|
|
1544 }
|
|
|
1545 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
1546
|
|
|
1547 if (string != NULL)
|
|
|
1548 {
|
|
|
1549 selection_data->type = selection_data->target;
|
|
|
1550 selection_data->format = 8; /* 8 bits per char */
|
|
|
1551
|
|
|
1552 gtk_selection_data_set(selection_data, type, 8, string, length);
|
|
|
1553 vim_free(string);
|
|
|
1554 }
|
|
|
1555 }
|
|
|
1556
|
|
|
1557 /*
|
|
|
1558 * Check if the GUI can be started. Called before gvimrc is sourced.
|
|
|
1559 * Return OK or FAIL.
|
|
|
1560 */
|
|
|
1561 int
|
|
|
1562 gui_mch_init_check(void)
|
|
|
1563 {
|
|
|
1564 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
1565 /* This is needed to make the locale handling consistant between the GUI
|
|
|
1566 * and the rest of VIM. */
|
|
|
1567 gtk_set_locale();
|
|
|
1568 #endif
|
|
|
1569
|
|
|
1570 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME
|
|
|
1571 if (gtk_socket_id == 0)
|
|
|
1572 using_gnome = 1;
|
|
|
1573 #endif
|
|
|
1574
|
|
|
1575 /* Don't use gtk_init() or gnome_init(), it exits on failure. */
|
|
|
1576 if (!gtk_init_check(&gui_argc, &gui_argv))
|
|
|
1577 {
|
|
|
1578 gui.dying = TRUE;
|
|
|
1579 EMSG(_(e_opendisp));
|
|
|
1580 return FAIL;
|
|
|
1581 }
|
|
|
1582
|
|
|
1583 return OK;
|
|
|
1584 }
|
|
|
1585
|
|
|
1586
|
|
|
1587 /****************************************************************************
|
|
|
1588 * Mouse handling callbacks
|
|
|
1589 */
|
|
|
1590
|
|
|
1591
|
|
|
1592 static guint mouse_click_timer = 0;
|
|
|
1593 static int mouse_timed_out = TRUE;
|
|
|
1594
|
|
|
1595 /*
|
|
|
1596 * Timer used to recognize multiple clicks of the mouse button
|
|
|
1597 */
|
|
|
1598 static gint
|
|
|
1599 mouse_click_timer_cb(gpointer data)
|
|
|
1600 {
|
|
|
1601 /* we don't use this information currently */
|
|
|
1602 int *timed_out = (int *) data;
|
|
|
1603
|
|
|
1604 *timed_out = TRUE;
|
|
|
1605 return FALSE; /* don't happen again */
|
|
|
1606 }
|
|
|
1607
|
|
|
1608 static guint motion_repeat_timer = 0;
|
|
|
1609 static int motion_repeat_offset = FALSE;
|
|
|
1610 static gint motion_repeat_timer_cb(gpointer);
|
|
|
1611
|
|
|
1612 static void
|
|
|
1613 process_motion_notify(int x, int y, GdkModifierType state)
|
|
|
1614 {
|
|
|
1615 int button;
|
|
|
1616 int_u vim_modifiers;
|
|
|
1617
|
|
|
1618 button = (state & (GDK_BUTTON1_MASK | GDK_BUTTON2_MASK |
|
|
|
1619 GDK_BUTTON3_MASK | GDK_BUTTON4_MASK |
|
|
|
1620 GDK_BUTTON5_MASK))
|
|
|
1621 ? MOUSE_DRAG : ' ';
|
|
|
1622
|
|
|
1623 /* If our pointer is currently hidden, then we should show it. */
|
|
|
1624 gui_mch_mousehide(FALSE);
|
|
|
1625
|
|
|
1626 /* Just moving the rodent above the drawing area without any button
|
|
|
1627 * being pressed. */
|
|
|
1628 if (button != MOUSE_DRAG)
|
|
|
1629 {
|
|
|
1630 gui_mouse_moved(x, y);
|
|
|
1631 return;
|
|
|
1632 }
|
|
|
1633
|
|
|
1634 /* translate modifier coding between the main engine and GTK */
|
|
179
|
1635 vim_modifiers = modifiers_gdk2mouse(state);
|
|
7
|
1636
|
|
|
1637 /* inform the editor engine about the occurence of this event */
|
|
|
1638 gui_send_mouse_event(button, x, y, FALSE, vim_modifiers);
|
|
|
1639
|
|
|
1640 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
1641 gtk_main_quit();
|
|
|
1642
|
|
|
1643 /*
|
|
|
1644 * Auto repeat timer handling.
|
|
|
1645 */
|
|
|
1646 if (x < 0 || y < 0
|
|
|
1647 || x >= gui.drawarea->allocation.width
|
|
|
1648 || y >= gui.drawarea->allocation.height)
|
|
|
1649 {
|
|
|
1650
|
|
|
1651 int dx;
|
|
|
1652 int dy;
|
|
|
1653 int offshoot;
|
|
|
1654 int delay = 10;
|
|
|
1655
|
|
|
1656 /* Calculate the maximal distance of the cursor from the drawing area.
|
|
|
1657 * (offshoot can't become negative here!).
|
|
|
1658 */
|
|
|
1659 dx = x < 0 ? -x : x - gui.drawarea->allocation.width;
|
|
|
1660 dy = y < 0 ? -y : y - gui.drawarea->allocation.height;
|
|
|
1661
|
|
|
1662 offshoot = dx > dy ? dx : dy;
|
|
|
1663
|
|
|
1664 /* Make a linearly declaying timer delay with a threshold of 5 at a
|
|
|
1665 * distance of 127 pixels from the main window.
|
|
|
1666 *
|
|
|
1667 * One could think endlessly about the most ergonomic variant here.
|
|
|
1668 * For example it could make sense to calculate the distance from the
|
|
|
1669 * drags start instead...
|
|
|
1670 *
|
|
|
1671 * Maybe a parabolic interpolation would suite us better here too...
|
|
|
1672 */
|
|
|
1673 if (offshoot > 127)
|
|
|
1674 {
|
|
|
1675 /* 5 appears to be somehow near to my perceptual limits :-). */
|
|
|
1676 delay = 5;
|
|
|
1677 }
|
|
|
1678 else
|
|
|
1679 {
|
|
|
1680 delay = (130 * (127 - offshoot)) / 127 + 5;
|
|
|
1681 }
|
|
|
1682
|
|
|
1683 /* shoot again */
|
|
|
1684 if (!motion_repeat_timer)
|
|
|
1685 motion_repeat_timer = gtk_timeout_add((guint32)delay,
|
|
|
1686 motion_repeat_timer_cb, NULL);
|
|
|
1687 }
|
|
|
1688 }
|
|
|
1689
|
|
|
1690 /*
|
|
|
1691 * Timer used to recognize multiple clicks of the mouse button.
|
|
|
1692 */
|
|
|
1693 /*ARGSUSED0*/
|
|
|
1694 static gint
|
|
|
1695 motion_repeat_timer_cb(gpointer data)
|
|
|
1696 {
|
|
|
1697 int x;
|
|
|
1698 int y;
|
|
|
1699 GdkModifierType state;
|
|
|
1700
|
|
|
1701 gdk_window_get_pointer(gui.drawarea->window, &x, &y, &state);
|
|
|
1702
|
|
|
1703 if (!(state & (GDK_BUTTON1_MASK | GDK_BUTTON2_MASK |
|
|
|
1704 GDK_BUTTON3_MASK | GDK_BUTTON4_MASK |
|
|
|
1705 GDK_BUTTON5_MASK)))
|
|
|
1706 {
|
|
|
1707 motion_repeat_timer = 0;
|
|
|
1708 return FALSE;
|
|
|
1709 }
|
|
|
1710
|
|
|
1711 /* If there already is a mouse click in the input buffer, wait another
|
|
|
1712 * time (otherwise we would create a backlog of clicks) */
|
|
|
1713 if (vim_used_in_input_buf() > 10)
|
|
|
1714 return TRUE;
|
|
|
1715
|
|
|
1716 motion_repeat_timer = 0;
|
|
|
1717
|
|
|
1718 /*
|
|
|
1719 * Fake a motion event.
|
|
|
1720 * Trick: Pretend the mouse moved to the next character on every other
|
|
|
1721 * event, otherwise drag events will be discarded, because they are still
|
|
|
1722 * in the same character.
|
|
|
1723 */
|
|
|
1724 if (motion_repeat_offset)
|
|
|
1725 x += gui.char_width;
|
|
|
1726
|
|
|
1727 motion_repeat_offset = !motion_repeat_offset;
|
|
|
1728 process_motion_notify(x, y, state);
|
|
|
1729
|
|
|
1730 /* Don't happen again. We will get reinstalled in the synthetic event
|
|
|
1731 * if needed -- thus repeating should still work. */
|
|
|
1732 return FALSE;
|
|
|
1733 }
|
|
|
1734
|
|
|
1735 /*ARGSUSED2*/
|
|
|
1736 static gint
|
|
|
1737 motion_notify_event(GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventMotion *event, gpointer data)
|
|
|
1738 {
|
|
|
1739 if (event->is_hint)
|
|
|
1740 {
|
|
|
1741 int x;
|
|
|
1742 int y;
|
|
|
1743 GdkModifierType state;
|
|
|
1744
|
|
|
1745 gdk_window_get_pointer(widget->window, &x, &y, &state);
|
|
|
1746 process_motion_notify(x, y, state);
|
|
|
1747 }
|
|
|
1748 else
|
|
|
1749 {
|
|
|
1750 process_motion_notify((int)event->x, (int)event->y,
|
|
|
1751 (GdkModifierType)event->state);
|
|
|
1752 }
|
|
|
1753
|
|
|
1754 return TRUE; /* handled */
|
|
|
1755 }
|
|
|
1756
|
|
|
1757
|
|
|
1758 /*
|
|
|
1759 * Mouse button handling. Note please that we are capturing multiple click's
|
|
|
1760 * by our own timeout mechanism instead of the one provided by GTK+ itself.
|
|
|
1761 * This is due to the way the generic VIM code is recognizing multiple clicks.
|
|
|
1762 */
|
|
|
1763 /*ARGSUSED2*/
|
|
|
1764 static gint
|
|
|
1765 button_press_event(GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventButton *event, gpointer data)
|
|
|
1766 {
|
|
|
1767 int button;
|
|
|
1768 int repeated_click = FALSE;
|
|
|
1769 int x, y;
|
|
|
1770 int_u vim_modifiers;
|
|
|
1771
|
|
|
1772 /* Make sure we have focus now we've been selected */
|
|
|
1773 if (gtk_socket_id != 0 && !GTK_WIDGET_HAS_FOCUS(widget))
|
|
|
1774 gtk_widget_grab_focus(widget);
|
|
|
1775
|
|
|
1776 /*
|
|
|
1777 * Don't let additional events about multiple clicks send by GTK to us
|
|
|
1778 * after the initial button press event confuse us.
|
|
|
1779 */
|
|
|
1780 if (event->type != GDK_BUTTON_PRESS)
|
|
|
1781 return FALSE;
|
|
|
1782
|
|
|
1783 x = event->x;
|
|
|
1784 y = event->y;
|
|
|
1785
|
|
|
1786 /* Handle multiple clicks */
|
|
|
1787 if (!mouse_timed_out && mouse_click_timer)
|
|
|
1788 {
|
|
|
1789 gtk_timeout_remove(mouse_click_timer);
|
|
|
1790 mouse_click_timer = 0;
|
|
|
1791 repeated_click = TRUE;
|
|
|
1792 }
|
|
|
1793
|
|
|
1794 mouse_timed_out = FALSE;
|
|
|
1795 mouse_click_timer = gtk_timeout_add((guint32)p_mouset,
|
|
|
1796 mouse_click_timer_cb, &mouse_timed_out);
|
|
|
1797
|
|
|
1798 switch (event->button)
|
|
|
1799 {
|
|
|
1800 case 1:
|
|
|
1801 button = MOUSE_LEFT;
|
|
|
1802 break;
|
|
|
1803 case 2:
|
|
|
1804 button = MOUSE_MIDDLE;
|
|
|
1805 break;
|
|
|
1806 case 3:
|
|
|
1807 button = MOUSE_RIGHT;
|
|
|
1808 break;
|
|
|
1809 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
1810 case 4:
|
|
|
1811 button = MOUSE_4;
|
|
|
1812 break;
|
|
|
1813 case 5:
|
|
|
1814 button = MOUSE_5;
|
|
|
1815 break;
|
|
|
1816 #endif
|
|
|
1817 default:
|
|
|
1818 return FALSE; /* Unknown button */
|
|
|
1819 }
|
|
|
1820
|
|
|
1821 #ifdef FEAT_XIM
|
|
|
1822 /* cancel any preediting */
|
|
|
1823 if (im_is_preediting())
|
|
|
1824 xim_reset();
|
|
|
1825 #endif
|
|
|
1826
|
|
179
|
1827 vim_modifiers = modifiers_gdk2mouse(event->state);
|
|
7
|
1828
|
|
|
1829 gui_send_mouse_event(button, x, y, repeated_click, vim_modifiers);
|
|
|
1830 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
1831 gtk_main_quit(); /* make sure the above will be handled immediately */
|
|
|
1832
|
|
|
1833 return TRUE;
|
|
|
1834 }
|
|
|
1835
|
|
|
1836 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
1837 /*
|
|
|
1838 * GTK+ 2 doesn't handle mouse buttons 4, 5, 6 and 7 the same way as GTK+ 1.
|
|
|
1839 * Instead, it abstracts scrolling via the new GdkEventScroll.
|
|
|
1840 */
|
|
|
1841 /*ARGSUSED2*/
|
|
|
1842 static gboolean
|
|
|
1843 scroll_event(GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventScroll *event, gpointer data)
|
|
|
1844 {
|
|
|
1845 int button;
|
|
179
|
1846 int_u vim_modifiers;
|
|
7
|
1847
|
|
|
1848 if (gtk_socket_id != 0 && !GTK_WIDGET_HAS_FOCUS(widget))
|
|
|
1849 gtk_widget_grab_focus(widget);
|
|
|
1850
|
|
|
1851 switch (event->direction)
|
|
|
1852 {
|
|
|
1853 case GDK_SCROLL_UP:
|
|
|
1854 button = MOUSE_4;
|
|
|
1855 break;
|
|
|
1856 case GDK_SCROLL_DOWN:
|
|
|
1857 button = MOUSE_5;
|
|
|
1858 break;
|
|
|
1859 default: /* We don't care about left and right... Yet. */
|
|
|
1860 return FALSE;
|
|
|
1861 }
|
|
|
1862
|
|
|
1863 # ifdef FEAT_XIM
|
|
|
1864 /* cancel any preediting */
|
|
|
1865 if (im_is_preediting())
|
|
|
1866 xim_reset();
|
|
|
1867 # endif
|
|
|
1868
|
|
179
|
1869 vim_modifiers = modifiers_gdk2mouse(event->state);
|
|
7
|
1870
|
|
|
1871 gui_send_mouse_event(button, (int)event->x, (int)event->y,
|
|
|
1872 FALSE, vim_modifiers);
|
|
|
1873
|
|
|
1874 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
1875 gtk_main_quit(); /* make sure the above will be handled immediately */
|
|
|
1876
|
|
|
1877 return TRUE;
|
|
|
1878 }
|
|
|
1879 #endif /* HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
1880
|
|
|
1881
|
|
|
1882 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
1883 static gint
|
|
|
1884 button_release_event(GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventButton *event, gpointer data)
|
|
|
1885 {
|
|
|
1886 int x, y;
|
|
|
1887 int_u vim_modifiers;
|
|
|
1888
|
|
|
1889 /* Remove any motion "machine gun" timers used for automatic further
|
|
|
1890 extension of allocation areas if outside of the applications window
|
|
|
1891 area .*/
|
|
|
1892 if (motion_repeat_timer)
|
|
|
1893 {
|
|
|
1894 gtk_timeout_remove(motion_repeat_timer);
|
|
|
1895 motion_repeat_timer = 0;
|
|
|
1896 }
|
|
|
1897
|
|
|
1898 x = event->x;
|
|
|
1899 y = event->y;
|
|
|
1900
|
|
179
|
1901 vim_modifiers = modifiers_gdk2mouse(event->state);
|
|
7
|
1902
|
|
|
1903 gui_send_mouse_event(MOUSE_RELEASE, x, y, FALSE, vim_modifiers);
|
|
|
1904 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
1905 gtk_main_quit(); /* make sure it will be handled immediately */
|
|
|
1906
|
|
|
1907 return TRUE;
|
|
|
1908 }
|
|
|
1909
|
|
|
1910
|
|
|
1911 #ifdef FEAT_DND
|
|
|
1912 /****************************************************************************
|
|
|
1913 * Drag aNd Drop support handlers.
|
|
|
1914 */
|
|
|
1915
|
|
|
1916 /*
|
|
|
1917 * Count how many items there may be and separate them with a NUL.
|
|
|
1918 * Apparently the items are separated with \r\n. This is not documented,
|
|
|
1919 * thus be careful not to go past the end. Also allow separation with
|
|
|
1920 * NUL characters.
|
|
|
1921 */
|
|
|
1922 static int
|
|
|
1923 count_and_decode_uri_list(char_u *out, char_u *raw, int len)
|
|
|
1924 {
|
|
|
1925 int i;
|
|
|
1926 char_u *p = out;
|
|
|
1927 int count = 0;
|
|
|
1928
|
|
|
1929 for (i = 0; i < len; ++i)
|
|
|
1930 {
|
|
|
1931 if (raw[i] == NUL || raw[i] == '\n' || raw[i] == '\r')
|
|
|
1932 {
|
|
|
1933 if (p > out && p[-1] != NUL)
|
|
|
1934 {
|
|
|
1935 ++count;
|
|
|
1936 *p++ = NUL;
|
|
|
1937 }
|
|
|
1938 }
|
|
|
1939 else if (raw[i] == '%' && i + 2 < len && hexhex2nr(raw + i + 1) > 0)
|
|
|
1940 {
|
|
|
1941 *p++ = hexhex2nr(raw + i + 1);
|
|
|
1942 i += 2;
|
|
|
1943 }
|
|
|
1944 else
|
|
|
1945 *p++ = raw[i];
|
|
|
1946 }
|
|
|
1947 if (p > out && p[-1] != NUL)
|
|
|
1948 {
|
|
|
1949 *p = NUL; /* last item didn't have \r or \n */
|
|
|
1950 ++count;
|
|
|
1951 }
|
|
|
1952 return count;
|
|
|
1953 }
|
|
|
1954
|
|
|
1955 /*
|
|
|
1956 * Parse NUL separated "src" strings. Make it an array "outlist" form. On
|
|
|
1957 * this process, URI which protocol is not "file:" are removed. Return
|
|
|
1958 * length of array (less than "max").
|
|
|
1959 */
|
|
|
1960 static int
|
|
|
1961 filter_uri_list(char_u **outlist, int max, char_u *src)
|
|
|
1962 {
|
|
|
1963 int i, j;
|
|
|
1964
|
|
|
1965 for (i = j = 0; i < max; ++i)
|
|
|
1966 {
|
|
|
1967 outlist[i] = NULL;
|
|
|
1968 if (STRNCMP(src, "file:", 5) == 0)
|
|
|
1969 {
|
|
|
1970 src += 5;
|
|
|
1971 if (STRNCMP(src, "//localhost", 11) == 0)
|
|
|
1972 src += 11;
|
|
|
1973 while (src[0] == '/' && src[1] == '/')
|
|
|
1974 ++src;
|
|
|
1975 outlist[j++] = vim_strsave(src);
|
|
|
1976 }
|
|
|
1977 src += STRLEN(src) + 1;
|
|
|
1978 }
|
|
|
1979 return j;
|
|
|
1980 }
|
|
|
1981
|
|
|
1982 static char_u **
|
|
|
1983 parse_uri_list(int *count, char_u *data, int len)
|
|
|
1984 {
|
|
|
1985 int n = 0;
|
|
|
1986 char_u *tmp = NULL;
|
|
|
1987 char_u **array = NULL;;
|
|
|
1988
|
|
|
1989 if (data != NULL && len > 0 && (tmp = (char_u *)alloc(len + 1)) != NULL)
|
|
|
1990 {
|
|
|
1991 n = count_and_decode_uri_list(tmp, data, len);
|
|
|
1992 if (n > 0 && (array = (char_u **)alloc(n * sizeof(char_u *))) != NULL)
|
|
|
1993 n = filter_uri_list(array, n, tmp);
|
|
|
1994 }
|
|
|
1995 vim_free(tmp);
|
|
|
1996 *count = n;
|
|
|
1997 return array;
|
|
|
1998 }
|
|
|
1999
|
|
|
2000 static void
|
|
|
2001 drag_handle_uri_list(GdkDragContext *context,
|
|
|
2002 GtkSelectionData *data,
|
|
|
2003 guint time_,
|
|
|
2004 GdkModifierType state,
|
|
|
2005 gint x,
|
|
|
2006 gint y)
|
|
|
2007 {
|
|
|
2008 char_u **fnames;
|
|
|
2009 int nfiles = 0;
|
|
|
2010
|
|
|
2011 fnames = parse_uri_list(&nfiles, data->data, data->length);
|
|
|
2012
|
|
|
2013 if (fnames != NULL && nfiles > 0)
|
|
|
2014 {
|
|
179
|
2015 int_u modifiers;
|
|
7
|
2016
|
|
|
2017 gtk_drag_finish(context, TRUE, FALSE, time_); /* accept */
|
|
|
2018
|
|
179
|
2019 modifiers = modifiers_gdk2mouse(state);
|
|
7
|
2020
|
|
|
2021 gui_handle_drop(x, y, modifiers, fnames, nfiles);
|
|
|
2022 }
|
|
|
2023 }
|
|
|
2024
|
|
|
2025 static void
|
|
|
2026 drag_handle_text(GdkDragContext *context,
|
|
|
2027 GtkSelectionData *data,
|
|
|
2028 guint time_,
|
|
|
2029 GdkModifierType state)
|
|
|
2030 {
|
|
|
2031 char_u dropkey[6] = {CSI, KS_MODIFIER, 0, CSI, KS_EXTRA, (char_u)KE_DROP};
|
|
|
2032 char_u *text;
|
|
|
2033 int len;
|
|
|
2034 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
2035 char_u *tmpbuf = NULL;
|
|
|
2036 # endif
|
|
|
2037
|
|
|
2038 text = data->data;
|
|
|
2039 len = data->length;
|
|
|
2040
|
|
|
2041 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
2042 if (data->type == utf8_string_atom)
|
|
|
2043 {
|
|
|
2044 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
2045 if (input_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
2046 tmpbuf = string_convert(&input_conv, text, &len);
|
|
|
2047 # else
|
|
|
2048 vimconv_T conv;
|
|
|
2049
|
|
|
2050 conv.vc_type = CONV_NONE;
|
|
|
2051 convert_setup(&conv, (char_u *)"utf-8", p_enc);
|
|
|
2052
|
|
|
2053 if (conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
2054 {
|
|
|
2055 tmpbuf = string_convert(&conv, text, &len);
|
|
|
2056 convert_setup(&conv, NULL, NULL);
|
|
|
2057 }
|
|
|
2058 # endif
|
|
|
2059 if (tmpbuf != NULL)
|
|
|
2060 text = tmpbuf;
|
|
|
2061 }
|
|
|
2062 # endif /* FEAT_MBYTE */
|
|
|
2063
|
|
|
2064 dnd_yank_drag_data(text, (long)len);
|
|
|
2065 gtk_drag_finish(context, TRUE, FALSE, time_); /* accept */
|
|
|
2066 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
2067 vim_free(tmpbuf);
|
|
|
2068 # endif
|
|
|
2069
|
|
179
|
2070 dropkey[2] = modifiers_gdk2vim(state);
|
|
7
|
2071
|
|
|
2072 if (dropkey[2] != 0)
|
|
|
2073 add_to_input_buf(dropkey, (int)sizeof(dropkey));
|
|
|
2074 else
|
|
|
2075 add_to_input_buf(dropkey + 3, (int)(sizeof(dropkey) - 3));
|
|
|
2076
|
|
|
2077 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
2078 gtk_main_quit();
|
|
|
2079 }
|
|
|
2080
|
|
|
2081 /*
|
|
|
2082 * DND receiver.
|
|
|
2083 */
|
|
|
2084 /*ARGSUSED2*/
|
|
|
2085 static void
|
|
|
2086 drag_data_received_cb(GtkWidget *widget,
|
|
|
2087 GdkDragContext *context,
|
|
|
2088 gint x,
|
|
|
2089 gint y,
|
|
|
2090 GtkSelectionData *data,
|
|
|
2091 guint info,
|
|
|
2092 guint time_,
|
|
|
2093 gpointer user_data)
|
|
|
2094 {
|
|
|
2095 GdkModifierType state;
|
|
|
2096
|
|
|
2097 /* Guard against trash */
|
|
|
2098 if (data->data == NULL
|
|
|
2099 || data->length <= 0
|
|
|
2100 || data->format != 8
|
|
|
2101 || data->data[data->length] != '\0')
|
|
|
2102 {
|
|
|
2103 gtk_drag_finish(context, FALSE, FALSE, time_);
|
|
|
2104 return;
|
|
|
2105 }
|
|
|
2106
|
|
|
2107 /* Get the current modifier state for proper distinguishment between
|
|
|
2108 * different operations later. */
|
|
|
2109 gdk_window_get_pointer(widget->window, NULL, NULL, &state);
|
|
|
2110
|
|
|
2111 /* Not sure about the role of "text/plain" here... */
|
|
|
2112 if (info == (guint)TARGET_TEXT_URI_LIST)
|
|
|
2113 drag_handle_uri_list(context, data, time_, state, x, y);
|
|
|
2114 else
|
|
|
2115 drag_handle_text(context, data, time_, state);
|
|
|
2116
|
|
|
2117 }
|
|
|
2118 #endif /* FEAT_DND */
|
|
|
2119
|
|
|
2120
|
|
|
2121 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION)
|
|
|
2122 /*
|
|
|
2123 * GnomeClient interact callback. Check for unsaved buffers that cannot
|
|
|
2124 * be abandoned and pop up a dialog asking the user for confirmation if
|
|
|
2125 * necessary.
|
|
|
2126 */
|
|
|
2127 /*ARGSUSED0*/
|
|
|
2128 static void
|
|
|
2129 sm_client_check_changed_any(GnomeClient *client,
|
|
|
2130 gint key,
|
|
|
2131 GnomeDialogType type,
|
|
|
2132 gpointer data)
|
|
|
2133 {
|
|
|
2134 cmdmod_T save_cmdmod;
|
|
|
2135 gboolean shutdown_cancelled;
|
|
|
2136
|
|
|
2137 save_cmdmod = cmdmod;
|
|
|
2138
|
|
|
2139 # ifdef FEAT_BROWSE
|
|
|
2140 cmdmod.browse = TRUE;
|
|
|
2141 # endif
|
|
|
2142 # if defined(FEAT_GUI_DIALOG) || defined(FEAT_CON_DIALOG)
|
|
|
2143 cmdmod.confirm = TRUE;
|
|
|
2144 # endif
|
|
|
2145 /*
|
|
|
2146 * If there are changed buffers, present the user with
|
|
|
2147 * a dialog if possible, otherwise give an error message.
|
|
|
2148 */
|
|
|
2149 shutdown_cancelled = check_changed_any(FALSE);
|
|
|
2150
|
|
|
2151 exiting = FALSE;
|
|
|
2152 cmdmod = save_cmdmod;
|
|
|
2153 setcursor(); /* position the cursor */
|
|
|
2154 out_flush();
|
|
|
2155 /*
|
|
|
2156 * If the user hit the [Cancel] button the whole shutdown
|
|
|
2157 * will be cancelled. Wow, quite powerful feature (:
|
|
|
2158 */
|
|
|
2159 gnome_interaction_key_return(key, shutdown_cancelled);
|
|
|
2160 }
|
|
|
2161
|
|
|
2162 /*
|
|
|
2163 * Generate a script that can be used to restore the current editing session.
|
|
|
2164 * Save the value of v:this_session before running :mksession in order to make
|
|
|
2165 * automagic session save fully transparent. Return TRUE on success.
|
|
|
2166 */
|
|
|
2167 static int
|
|
|
2168 write_session_file(char_u *filename)
|
|
|
2169 {
|
|
|
2170 char_u *escaped_filename;
|
|
|
2171 char *mksession_cmdline;
|
|
|
2172 unsigned int save_ssop_flags;
|
|
|
2173 int failed;
|
|
|
2174
|
|
|
2175 /*
|
|
|
2176 * Build an ex command line to create a script that restores the current
|
|
|
2177 * session if executed. Escape the filename to avoid nasty surprises.
|
|
|
2178 */
|
|
|
2179 escaped_filename = vim_strsave_escaped(filename, escape_chars);
|
|
|
2180 if (escaped_filename == NULL)
|
|
|
2181 return FALSE;
|
|
|
2182 mksession_cmdline = g_strconcat("mksession ", (char *)escaped_filename, NULL);
|
|
|
2183 vim_free(escaped_filename);
|
|
|
2184 /*
|
|
|
2185 * Use a reasonable hardcoded set of 'sessionoptions' flags to avoid
|
|
|
2186 * unpredictable effects when the session is saved automatically. Also,
|
|
|
2187 * we definitely need SSOP_GLOBALS to be able to restore v:this_session.
|
|
|
2188 * Don't use SSOP_BUFFERS to prevent the buffer list from becoming
|
|
|
2189 * enormously large if the GNOME session feature is used regularly.
|
|
|
2190 */
|
|
|
2191 save_ssop_flags = ssop_flags;
|
|
|
2192 ssop_flags = (SSOP_BLANK|SSOP_CURDIR|SSOP_FOLDS|SSOP_GLOBALS
|
|
|
2193 |SSOP_HELP|SSOP_OPTIONS|SSOP_WINSIZE);
|
|
|
2194
|
|
|
2195 do_cmdline_cmd((char_u *)"let Save_VV_this_session = v:this_session");
|
|
|
2196 failed = (do_cmdline_cmd((char_u *)mksession_cmdline) == FAIL);
|
|
|
2197 do_cmdline_cmd((char_u *)"let v:this_session = Save_VV_this_session");
|
|
150
|
2198 do_unlet((char_u *)"Save_VV_this_session", TRUE);
|
|
7
|
2199
|
|
|
2200 ssop_flags = save_ssop_flags;
|
|
|
2201 g_free(mksession_cmdline);
|
|
|
2202 /*
|
|
|
2203 * Reopen the file and append a command to restore v:this_session,
|
|
|
2204 * as if this save never happened. This is to avoid conflicts with
|
|
|
2205 * the user's own sessions. FIXME: It's probably less hackish to add
|
|
|
2206 * a "stealth" flag to 'sessionoptions' -- gotta ask Bram.
|
|
|
2207 */
|
|
|
2208 if (!failed)
|
|
|
2209 {
|
|
|
2210 FILE *fd;
|
|
|
2211
|
|
|
2212 fd = open_exfile(filename, TRUE, APPENDBIN);
|
|
|
2213
|
|
|
2214 failed = (fd == NULL
|
|
|
2215 || put_line(fd, "let v:this_session = Save_VV_this_session") == FAIL
|
|
|
2216 || put_line(fd, "unlet Save_VV_this_session") == FAIL);
|
|
|
2217
|
|
|
2218 if (fd != NULL && fclose(fd) != 0)
|
|
|
2219 failed = TRUE;
|
|
|
2220
|
|
|
2221 if (failed)
|
|
|
2222 mch_remove(filename);
|
|
|
2223 }
|
|
|
2224
|
|
|
2225 return !failed;
|
|
|
2226 }
|
|
|
2227
|
|
|
2228 /*
|
|
|
2229 * "save_yourself" signal handler. Initiate an interaction to ask the user
|
|
|
2230 * for confirmation if necessary. Save the current editing session and tell
|
|
|
2231 * the session manager how to restart Vim.
|
|
|
2232 */
|
|
|
2233 /*ARGSUSED1*/
|
|
|
2234 static gboolean
|
|
|
2235 sm_client_save_yourself(GnomeClient *client,
|
|
|
2236 gint phase,
|
|
|
2237 GnomeSaveStyle save_style,
|
|
|
2238 gboolean shutdown,
|
|
|
2239 GnomeInteractStyle interact_style,
|
|
|
2240 gboolean fast,
|
|
|
2241 gpointer data)
|
|
|
2242 {
|
|
|
2243 static const char suffix[] = "-session.vim";
|
|
|
2244 char *session_file;
|
|
|
2245 unsigned int len;
|
|
|
2246 gboolean success;
|
|
|
2247
|
|
|
2248 /* Always request an interaction if possible. check_changed_any()
|
|
|
2249 * won't actually show a dialog unless any buffers have been modified.
|
|
|
2250 * There doesn't seem to be an obvious way to check that without
|
|
|
2251 * automatically firing the dialog. Anyway, it works just fine. */
|
|
|
2252 if (interact_style == GNOME_INTERACT_ANY)
|
|
|
2253 gnome_client_request_interaction(client, GNOME_DIALOG_NORMAL,
|
|
|
2254 &sm_client_check_changed_any,
|
|
|
2255 NULL);
|
|
|
2256 out_flush();
|
|
|
2257 ml_sync_all(FALSE, FALSE); /* preserve all swap files */
|
|
|
2258
|
|
|
2259 /* The path is unique for each session save. We do neither know nor care
|
|
|
2260 * which session script will actually be used later. This decision is in
|
|
|
2261 * the domain of the session manager. */
|
|
|
2262 session_file = gnome_config_get_real_path(
|
|
|
2263 gnome_client_get_config_prefix(client));
|
|
|
2264 len = strlen(session_file);
|
|
|
2265
|
|
|
2266 if (len > 0 && session_file[len-1] == G_DIR_SEPARATOR)
|
|
|
2267 --len; /* get rid of the superfluous trailing '/' */
|
|
|
2268
|
|
|
2269 session_file = g_renew(char, session_file, len + sizeof(suffix));
|
|
|
2270 memcpy(session_file + len, suffix, sizeof(suffix));
|
|
|
2271
|
|
|
2272 success = write_session_file((char_u *)session_file);
|
|
|
2273
|
|
|
2274 if (success)
|
|
|
2275 {
|
|
|
2276 const char *argv[8];
|
|
|
2277 int i;
|
|
|
2278
|
|
|
2279 /* Tell the session manager how to wipe out the stored session data.
|
|
|
2280 * This isn't as dangerous as it looks, don't worry :) session_file
|
|
|
2281 * is a unique absolute filename. Usually it'll be something like
|
|
|
2282 * `/home/user/.gnome2/vim-XXXXXX-session.vim'. */
|
|
|
2283 i = 0;
|
|
|
2284 argv[i++] = "rm";
|
|
|
2285 argv[i++] = session_file;
|
|
|
2286 argv[i] = NULL;
|
|
|
2287
|
|
|
2288 gnome_client_set_discard_command(client, i, (char **)argv);
|
|
|
2289
|
|
|
2290 /* Tell the session manager how to restore the just saved session.
|
|
|
2291 * This is easily done thanks to Vim's -S option. Pass the -f flag
|
|
|
2292 * since there's no need to fork -- it might even cause confusion.
|
|
|
2293 * Also pass the window role to give the WM something to match on.
|
|
|
2294 * The role is set in gui_mch_open(), thus should _never_ be NULL. */
|
|
|
2295 i = 0;
|
|
|
2296 argv[i++] = restart_command;
|
|
|
2297 argv[i++] = "-f";
|
|
|
2298 argv[i++] = "-g";
|
|
|
2299 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
2300 argv[i++] = "--role";
|
|
|
2301 argv[i++] = gtk_window_get_role(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin));
|
|
|
2302 # endif
|
|
|
2303 argv[i++] = "-S";
|
|
|
2304 argv[i++] = session_file;
|
|
|
2305 argv[i] = NULL;
|
|
|
2306
|
|
|
2307 gnome_client_set_restart_command(client, i, (char **)argv);
|
|
|
2308 gnome_client_set_clone_command(client, 0, NULL);
|
|
|
2309 }
|
|
|
2310
|
|
|
2311 g_free(session_file);
|
|
|
2312
|
|
|
2313 return success;
|
|
|
2314 }
|
|
|
2315
|
|
|
2316 /*
|
|
|
2317 * Called when the session manager wants us to die. There isn't much to save
|
|
|
2318 * here since "save_yourself" has been emitted before (unless serious trouble
|
|
|
2319 * is happening).
|
|
|
2320 */
|
|
|
2321 /*ARGSUSED0*/
|
|
|
2322 static void
|
|
|
2323 sm_client_die(GnomeClient *client, gpointer data)
|
|
|
2324 {
|
|
|
2325 /* Don't write messages to the GUI anymore */
|
|
|
2326 full_screen = FALSE;
|
|
|
2327
|
|
419
|
2328 vim_strncpy(IObuff,
|
|
|
2329 _("Vim: Received \"die\" request from session manager\n"),
|
|
|
2330 IOSIZE - 1);
|
|
7
|
2331 preserve_exit();
|
|
|
2332 }
|
|
|
2333
|
|
|
2334 /*
|
|
|
2335 * Connect our signal handlers to be notified on session save and shutdown.
|
|
|
2336 */
|
|
|
2337 static void
|
|
|
2338 setup_save_yourself(void)
|
|
|
2339 {
|
|
|
2340 GnomeClient *client;
|
|
|
2341
|
|
|
2342 client = gnome_master_client();
|
|
|
2343
|
|
|
2344 if (client != NULL)
|
|
|
2345 {
|
|
|
2346 /* Must use the deprecated gtk_signal_connect() for compatibility
|
|
|
2347 * with GNOME 1. Arrgh, zombies! */
|
|
|
2348 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(client), "save_yourself",
|
|
|
2349 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(&sm_client_save_yourself), NULL);
|
|
|
2350 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(client), "die",
|
|
|
2351 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(&sm_client_die), NULL);
|
|
|
2352 }
|
|
|
2353 }
|
|
|
2354
|
|
|
2355 #else /* !(FEAT_GUI_GNOME && FEAT_SESSION) */
|
|
|
2356
|
|
|
2357 # ifdef USE_XSMP
|
|
|
2358 /*
|
|
|
2359 * GTK tells us that XSMP needs attention
|
|
|
2360 */
|
|
|
2361 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
2362 static gboolean
|
|
|
2363 local_xsmp_handle_requests(source, condition, data)
|
|
|
2364 GIOChannel *source;
|
|
|
2365 GIOCondition condition;
|
|
|
2366 gpointer data;
|
|
|
2367 {
|
|
|
2368 if (condition == G_IO_IN)
|
|
|
2369 {
|
|
|
2370 /* Do stuff; maybe close connection */
|
|
|
2371 if (xsmp_handle_requests() == FAIL)
|
|
|
2372 g_io_channel_unref((GIOChannel *)data);
|
|
|
2373 return TRUE;
|
|
|
2374 }
|
|
|
2375 /* Error */
|
|
|
2376 g_io_channel_unref((GIOChannel *)data);
|
|
|
2377 xsmp_close();
|
|
|
2378 return TRUE;
|
|
|
2379 }
|
|
|
2380 # endif /* USE_XSMP */
|
|
|
2381
|
|
|
2382 /*
|
|
|
2383 * Setup the WM_PROTOCOLS to indicate we want the WM_SAVE_YOURSELF event.
|
|
|
2384 * This is an ugly use of X functions. GTK doesn't offer an alternative.
|
|
|
2385 */
|
|
|
2386 static void
|
|
|
2387 setup_save_yourself(void)
|
|
|
2388 {
|
|
|
2389 Atom *existing_atoms = NULL;
|
|
|
2390 int count = 0;
|
|
|
2391
|
|
|
2392 #ifdef USE_XSMP
|
|
|
2393 if (xsmp_icefd != -1)
|
|
|
2394 {
|
|
|
2395 /*
|
|
|
2396 * Use XSMP is preference to legacy WM_SAVE_YOURSELF;
|
|
|
2397 * set up GTK IO monitor
|
|
|
2398 */
|
|
|
2399 GIOChannel *g_io = g_io_channel_unix_new(xsmp_icefd);
|
|
|
2400
|
|
|
2401 g_io_add_watch(g_io, G_IO_IN | G_IO_ERR | G_IO_HUP,
|
|
|
2402 local_xsmp_handle_requests, (gpointer)g_io);
|
|
|
2403 }
|
|
|
2404 else
|
|
|
2405 #endif
|
|
|
2406 {
|
|
|
2407 /* Fall back to old method */
|
|
|
2408
|
|
|
2409 /* first get the existing value */
|
|
|
2410 if (XGetWMProtocols(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window),
|
|
|
2411 GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window),
|
|
|
2412 &existing_atoms, &count))
|
|
|
2413 {
|
|
|
2414 Atom *new_atoms;
|
|
|
2415 Atom save_yourself_xatom;
|
|
|
2416 int i;
|
|
|
2417
|
|
|
2418 save_yourself_xatom = GET_X_ATOM(save_yourself_atom);
|
|
|
2419
|
|
|
2420 /* check if WM_SAVE_YOURSELF isn't there yet */
|
|
|
2421 for (i = 0; i < count; ++i)
|
|
|
2422 if (existing_atoms[i] == save_yourself_xatom)
|
|
|
2423 break;
|
|
|
2424
|
|
|
2425 if (i == count)
|
|
|
2426 {
|
|
|
2427 /* allocate an Atoms array which is one item longer */
|
|
|
2428 new_atoms = (Atom *)alloc((unsigned)((count + 1)
|
|
|
2429 * sizeof(Atom)));
|
|
|
2430 if (new_atoms != NULL)
|
|
|
2431 {
|
|
|
2432 memcpy(new_atoms, existing_atoms, count * sizeof(Atom));
|
|
|
2433 new_atoms[count] = save_yourself_xatom;
|
|
|
2434 XSetWMProtocols(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window),
|
|
|
2435 GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window),
|
|
|
2436 new_atoms, count + 1);
|
|
|
2437 vim_free(new_atoms);
|
|
|
2438 }
|
|
|
2439 }
|
|
|
2440 XFree(existing_atoms);
|
|
|
2441 }
|
|
|
2442 }
|
|
|
2443 }
|
|
|
2444
|
|
|
2445 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
2446 /*
|
|
|
2447 * Installing a global event filter seems to be the only way to catch
|
|
|
2448 * client messages of type WM_PROTOCOLS without overriding GDK's own
|
|
|
2449 * client message event filter. Well, that's still better than trying
|
|
|
2450 * to guess what the GDK filter had done if it had been invoked instead
|
|
|
2451 * (This is what we did for GTK+ 1.2, see below).
|
|
|
2452 *
|
|
|
2453 * GTK2_FIXME: This doesn't seem to work. For some reason we never
|
|
|
2454 * receive WM_SAVE_YOURSELF even though everything is set up correctly.
|
|
|
2455 * I have the nasty feeling modern session managers just don't send this
|
|
|
2456 * deprecated message anymore. Addition: confirmed by several people.
|
|
|
2457 *
|
|
|
2458 * The GNOME session support is much cooler anyway. Unlike this ugly
|
|
|
2459 * WM_SAVE_YOURSELF hack it actually stores the session... And yes,
|
|
|
2460 * it should work with KDE as well.
|
|
|
2461 */
|
|
|
2462 /*ARGSUSED1*/
|
|
|
2463 static GdkFilterReturn
|
|
|
2464 global_event_filter(GdkXEvent *xev, GdkEvent *event, gpointer data)
|
|
|
2465 {
|
|
|
2466 XEvent *xevent = (XEvent *)xev;
|
|
|
2467
|
|
|
2468 if (xevent != NULL
|
|
|
2469 && xevent->type == ClientMessage
|
|
|
2470 && xevent->xclient.message_type == GET_X_ATOM(wm_protocols_atom)
|
|
|
2471 && xevent->xclient.data.l[0] == GET_X_ATOM(save_yourself_atom))
|
|
|
2472 {
|
|
|
2473 out_flush();
|
|
|
2474 ml_sync_all(FALSE, FALSE); /* preserve all swap files */
|
|
|
2475 /*
|
|
|
2476 * Set the window's WM_COMMAND property, to let the window manager
|
|
|
2477 * know we are done saving ourselves. We don't want to be
|
|
|
2478 * restarted, thus set argv to NULL.
|
|
|
2479 */
|
|
|
2480 XSetCommand(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window),
|
|
|
2481 GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window),
|
|
|
2482 NULL, 0);
|
|
|
2483 return GDK_FILTER_REMOVE;
|
|
|
2484 }
|
|
|
2485
|
|
|
2486 return GDK_FILTER_CONTINUE;
|
|
|
2487 }
|
|
|
2488
|
|
|
2489 # else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
2490
|
|
|
2491 /*
|
|
|
2492 * GDK handler for X ClientMessage events.
|
|
|
2493 */
|
|
|
2494 /*ARGSUSED2*/
|
|
|
2495 static GdkFilterReturn
|
|
|
2496 gdk_wm_protocols_filter(GdkXEvent *xev, GdkEvent *event, gpointer data)
|
|
|
2497 {
|
|
|
2498 /* From example in gdkevents.c/gdk_wm_protocols_filter */
|
|
|
2499 XEvent *xevent = (XEvent *)xev;
|
|
|
2500
|
|
|
2501 if (xevent != NULL)
|
|
|
2502 {
|
|
|
2503 if (xevent->xclient.data.l[0] == GET_X_ATOM(save_yourself_atom))
|
|
|
2504 {
|
|
|
2505 out_flush();
|
|
|
2506 ml_sync_all(FALSE, FALSE); /* preserve all swap files */
|
|
|
2507
|
|
|
2508 /* Set the window's WM_COMMAND property, to let the window manager
|
|
|
2509 * know we are done saving ourselves. We don't want to be
|
|
|
2510 * restarted, thus set argv to NULL. */
|
|
|
2511 XSetCommand(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window),
|
|
|
2512 GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window),
|
|
|
2513 NULL, 0);
|
|
|
2514 }
|
|
|
2515 /*
|
|
|
2516 * Functionality from gdkevents.c/gdk_wm_protocols_filter;
|
|
|
2517 * Registering this filter apparently overrides the default GDK one,
|
|
|
2518 * so we need to perform its functionality. There seems no way to
|
|
|
2519 * register for WM_PROTOCOLS, and only process the WM_SAVE_YOURSELF
|
|
|
2520 * bit; it's all or nothing. Update: No, there is a way -- but it
|
|
|
2521 * only works with GTK+ 2 apparently. See above.
|
|
|
2522 */
|
|
|
2523 else if (xevent->xclient.data.l[0] == GET_X_ATOM(gdk_wm_delete_window))
|
|
|
2524 {
|
|
|
2525 event->any.type = GDK_DELETE;
|
|
|
2526 return GDK_FILTER_TRANSLATE;
|
|
|
2527 }
|
|
|
2528 }
|
|
|
2529
|
|
|
2530 return GDK_FILTER_REMOVE;
|
|
|
2531 }
|
|
|
2532 # endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
2533
|
|
|
2534 #endif /* !(FEAT_GUI_GNOME && FEAT_SESSION) */
|
|
|
2535
|
|
|
2536
|
|
|
2537 /*
|
|
|
2538 * Setup the window icon & xcmdsrv comm after the main window has been realized.
|
|
|
2539 */
|
|
|
2540 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
2541 static void
|
|
|
2542 mainwin_realize(GtkWidget *widget, gpointer data)
|
|
|
2543 {
|
|
|
2544 /* If you get an error message here, you still need to unpack the runtime
|
|
|
2545 * archive! */
|
|
|
2546 #ifdef magick
|
|
|
2547 # undef magick
|
|
|
2548 #endif
|
|
|
2549 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
2550 /* A bit hackish, but avoids casting later and allows optimization */
|
|
|
2551 # define static static const
|
|
|
2552 #endif
|
|
|
2553 #define magick vim32x32
|
|
|
2554 #include "../runtime/vim32x32.xpm"
|
|
|
2555 #undef magick
|
|
|
2556 #define magick vim16x16
|
|
|
2557 #include "../runtime/vim16x16.xpm"
|
|
|
2558 #undef magick
|
|
|
2559 #define magick vim48x48
|
|
|
2560 #include "../runtime/vim48x48.xpm"
|
|
|
2561 #undef magick
|
|
|
2562 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
2563 # undef static
|
|
|
2564 #endif
|
|
|
2565
|
|
|
2566 /* When started with "--echo-wid" argument, write window ID on stdout. */
|
|
|
2567 if (echo_wid_arg)
|
|
|
2568 {
|
|
|
2569 printf("WID: %ld\n", (long)GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window));
|
|
|
2570 fflush(stdout);
|
|
|
2571 }
|
|
|
2572
|
|
|
2573 if (vim_strchr(p_go, GO_ICON) != NULL)
|
|
|
2574 {
|
|
|
2575 /*
|
|
|
2576 * Add an icon to the main window. For fun and convenience of the user.
|
|
|
2577 */
|
|
|
2578 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
2579 GList *icons = NULL;
|
|
|
2580
|
|
|
2581 icons = g_list_prepend(icons, gdk_pixbuf_new_from_xpm_data(vim16x16));
|
|
|
2582 icons = g_list_prepend(icons, gdk_pixbuf_new_from_xpm_data(vim32x32));
|
|
|
2583 icons = g_list_prepend(icons, gdk_pixbuf_new_from_xpm_data(vim48x48));
|
|
|
2584
|
|
|
2585 gtk_window_set_icon_list(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), icons);
|
|
|
2586
|
|
|
2587 g_list_foreach(icons, (GFunc)&g_object_unref, NULL);
|
|
|
2588 g_list_free(icons);
|
|
|
2589
|
|
|
2590 #else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
2591
|
|
|
2592 GdkPixmap *icon;
|
|
|
2593 GdkBitmap *icon_mask = NULL;
|
|
|
2594 char **magick = vim32x32;
|
|
|
2595 Display *xdisplay;
|
|
|
2596 Window root_window;
|
|
|
2597 XIconSize *size;
|
|
|
2598 int number_sizes;
|
|
|
2599 /*
|
|
|
2600 * Adjust the icon to the preferences of the actual window manager.
|
|
|
2601 * This is once again a workaround for a defficiency in GTK+ 1.2.
|
|
|
2602 */
|
|
|
2603 xdisplay = GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window);
|
|
|
2604 root_window = XRootWindow(xdisplay, DefaultScreen(xdisplay));
|
|
|
2605 if (XGetIconSizes(xdisplay, root_window, &size, &number_sizes))
|
|
|
2606 {
|
|
|
2607 if (number_sizes > 0)
|
|
|
2608 {
|
|
|
2609 if (size->max_height >= 48 && size->max_height >= 48)
|
|
|
2610 magick = vim48x48;
|
|
|
2611 else if (size->max_height >= 32 && size->max_height >= 32)
|
|
|
2612 magick = vim32x32;
|
|
|
2613 else if (size->max_height >= 16 && size->max_height >= 16)
|
|
|
2614 magick = vim16x16;
|
|
|
2615 }
|
|
|
2616 XFree(size);
|
|
|
2617 }
|
|
|
2618 icon = gdk_pixmap_create_from_xpm_d(gui.mainwin->window,
|
|
|
2619 &icon_mask, NULL, magick);
|
|
|
2620 if (icon != NULL)
|
|
|
2621 /* Note: for some reason gdk_window_set_icon() doesn't acquire
|
|
|
2622 * a reference on the pixmap, thus we _have_ to leak it. */
|
|
|
2623 gdk_window_set_icon(gui.mainwin->window, NULL, icon, icon_mask);
|
|
|
2624
|
|
|
2625 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
2626 }
|
|
|
2627
|
|
|
2628 #if !(defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION))
|
|
|
2629 /* Register a handler for WM_SAVE_YOURSELF with GDK's low-level X I/F */
|
|
|
2630 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
2631 gdk_window_add_filter(NULL, &global_event_filter, NULL);
|
|
|
2632 # else
|
|
|
2633 gdk_add_client_message_filter(wm_protocols_atom,
|
|
|
2634 &gdk_wm_protocols_filter, NULL);
|
|
|
2635 # endif
|
|
|
2636 #endif
|
|
|
2637 /* Setup to indicate to the window manager that we want to catch the
|
|
|
2638 * WM_SAVE_YOURSELF event. For GNOME, this connects to the session
|
|
|
2639 * manager instead. */
|
|
|
2640 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION)
|
|
|
2641 if (using_gnome)
|
|
|
2642 #endif
|
|
|
2643 setup_save_yourself();
|
|
|
2644
|
|
|
2645 #ifdef FEAT_CLIENTSERVER
|
|
|
2646 if (serverName == NULL && serverDelayedStartName != NULL)
|
|
|
2647 {
|
|
|
2648 /* This is a :gui command in a plain vim with no previous server */
|
|
|
2649 commWindow = GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window);
|
|
|
2650
|
|
|
2651 (void)serverRegisterName(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window),
|
|
|
2652 serverDelayedStartName);
|
|
|
2653 }
|
|
|
2654 else
|
|
|
2655 {
|
|
|
2656 /*
|
|
|
2657 * Cannot handle "XLib-only" windows with gtk event routines, we'll
|
|
|
2658 * have to change the "server" registration to that of the main window
|
|
|
2659 * If we have not registered a name yet, remember the window
|
|
|
2660 */
|
|
|
2661 serverChangeRegisteredWindow(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window),
|
|
|
2662 GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window));
|
|
|
2663 }
|
|
|
2664 gtk_widget_add_events(gui.mainwin, GDK_PROPERTY_CHANGE_MASK);
|
|
|
2665 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "property_notify_event",
|
|
|
2666 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(property_event), NULL);
|
|
|
2667 #endif
|
|
|
2668 }
|
|
|
2669
|
|
|
2670 static GdkCursor *
|
|
|
2671 create_blank_pointer(void)
|
|
|
2672 {
|
|
|
2673 GdkWindow *root_window = NULL;
|
|
|
2674 GdkPixmap *blank_mask;
|
|
|
2675 GdkCursor *cursor;
|
|
|
2676 GdkColor color = { 0, 0, 0, 0 };
|
|
|
2677 char blank_data[] = { 0x0 };
|
|
|
2678
|
|
|
2679 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD
|
|
|
2680 root_window = gtk_widget_get_root_window(gui.mainwin);
|
|
|
2681 #endif
|
|
|
2682
|
|
|
2683 /* Create a pseudo blank pointer, which is in fact one pixel by one pixel
|
|
|
2684 * in size. */
|
|
|
2685 blank_mask = gdk_bitmap_create_from_data(root_window, blank_data, 1, 1);
|
|
|
2686 cursor = gdk_cursor_new_from_pixmap(blank_mask, blank_mask,
|
|
|
2687 &color, &color, 0, 0);
|
|
|
2688 gdk_bitmap_unref(blank_mask);
|
|
|
2689
|
|
|
2690 return cursor;
|
|
|
2691 }
|
|
|
2692
|
|
|
2693 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD
|
|
|
2694 /*ARGSUSED1*/
|
|
|
2695 static void
|
|
|
2696 mainwin_screen_changed_cb(GtkWidget *widget,
|
|
|
2697 GdkScreen *previous_screen,
|
|
|
2698 gpointer data)
|
|
|
2699 {
|
|
|
2700 if (!gtk_widget_has_screen(widget))
|
|
|
2701 return;
|
|
|
2702
|
|
|
2703 /*
|
|
|
2704 * Recreate the invisble mouse cursor.
|
|
|
2705 */
|
|
|
2706 if (gui.blank_pointer != NULL)
|
|
|
2707 gdk_cursor_unref(gui.blank_pointer);
|
|
|
2708
|
|
|
2709 gui.blank_pointer = create_blank_pointer();
|
|
|
2710
|
|
|
2711 if (gui.pointer_hidden && gui.drawarea->window != NULL)
|
|
|
2712 gdk_window_set_cursor(gui.drawarea->window, gui.blank_pointer);
|
|
|
2713
|
|
|
2714 /*
|
|
|
2715 * Create a new PangoContext for this screen, and initialize it
|
|
|
2716 * with the current font if necessary.
|
|
|
2717 */
|
|
|
2718 if (gui.text_context != NULL)
|
|
|
2719 g_object_unref(gui.text_context);
|
|
|
2720
|
|
|
2721 gui.text_context = gtk_widget_create_pango_context(widget);
|
|
|
2722 pango_context_set_base_dir(gui.text_context, PANGO_DIRECTION_LTR);
|
|
|
2723
|
|
|
2724 if (gui.norm_font != NULL)
|
|
|
2725 {
|
|
38
|
2726 gui_mch_init_font(p_guifont, FALSE);
|
|
7
|
2727 gui_set_shellsize(FALSE, FALSE);
|
|
|
2728 }
|
|
|
2729 }
|
|
|
2730 #endif /* HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD */
|
|
|
2731
|
|
|
2732 /*
|
|
|
2733 * After the drawing area comes up, we calculate all colors and create the
|
|
|
2734 * dummy blank cursor.
|
|
|
2735 *
|
|
|
2736 * Don't try to set any VIM scrollbar sizes anywhere here. I'm relying on the
|
|
|
2737 * fact that the main VIM engine doesn't take them into account anywhere.
|
|
|
2738 */
|
|
|
2739 /*ARGSUSED1*/
|
|
|
2740 static void
|
|
|
2741 drawarea_realize_cb(GtkWidget *widget, gpointer data)
|
|
|
2742 {
|
|
|
2743 GtkWidget *sbar;
|
|
|
2744
|
|
|
2745 #ifdef FEAT_XIM
|
|
|
2746 xim_init();
|
|
|
2747 #endif
|
|
|
2748 gui_mch_new_colors();
|
|
|
2749 gui.text_gc = gdk_gc_new(gui.drawarea->window);
|
|
|
2750
|
|
|
2751 gui.blank_pointer = create_blank_pointer();
|
|
|
2752 if (gui.pointer_hidden)
|
|
|
2753 gdk_window_set_cursor(widget->window, gui.blank_pointer);
|
|
|
2754
|
|
|
2755 /* get the actual size of the scrollbars, if they are realized */
|
|
|
2756 sbar = firstwin->w_scrollbars[SBAR_LEFT].id;
|
|
|
2757 if (!sbar || (!gui.which_scrollbars[SBAR_LEFT]
|
|
|
2758 && firstwin->w_scrollbars[SBAR_RIGHT].id))
|
|
|
2759 sbar = firstwin->w_scrollbars[SBAR_RIGHT].id;
|
|
|
2760 if (sbar && GTK_WIDGET_REALIZED(sbar) && sbar->allocation.width)
|
|
|
2761 gui.scrollbar_width = sbar->allocation.width;
|
|
|
2762
|
|
|
2763 sbar = gui.bottom_sbar.id;
|
|
|
2764 if (sbar && GTK_WIDGET_REALIZED(sbar) && sbar->allocation.height)
|
|
|
2765 gui.scrollbar_height = sbar->allocation.height;
|
|
|
2766 }
|
|
|
2767
|
|
|
2768 /*
|
|
|
2769 * Properly clean up on shutdown.
|
|
|
2770 */
|
|
|
2771 /*ARGSUSED0*/
|
|
|
2772 static void
|
|
|
2773 drawarea_unrealize_cb(GtkWidget *widget, gpointer data)
|
|
|
2774 {
|
|
|
2775 /* Don't write messages to the GUI anymore */
|
|
|
2776 full_screen = FALSE;
|
|
|
2777
|
|
|
2778 #ifdef FEAT_XIM
|
|
|
2779 im_shutdown();
|
|
|
2780 #endif
|
|
|
2781 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
2782 if (gui.ascii_glyphs != NULL)
|
|
|
2783 {
|
|
|
2784 pango_glyph_string_free(gui.ascii_glyphs);
|
|
|
2785 gui.ascii_glyphs = NULL;
|
|
|
2786 }
|
|
|
2787 if (gui.ascii_font != NULL)
|
|
|
2788 {
|
|
|
2789 g_object_unref(gui.ascii_font);
|
|
|
2790 gui.ascii_font = NULL;
|
|
|
2791 }
|
|
|
2792 g_object_unref(gui.text_context);
|
|
|
2793 gui.text_context = NULL;
|
|
|
2794
|
|
|
2795 g_object_unref(gui.text_gc);
|
|
|
2796 gui.text_gc = NULL;
|
|
|
2797
|
|
|
2798 gdk_cursor_unref(gui.blank_pointer);
|
|
|
2799 gui.blank_pointer = NULL;
|
|
|
2800 #else
|
|
|
2801 gdk_gc_unref(gui.text_gc);
|
|
|
2802 gui.text_gc = NULL;
|
|
|
2803
|
|
|
2804 gdk_cursor_destroy(gui.blank_pointer);
|
|
|
2805 gui.blank_pointer = NULL;
|
|
|
2806 #endif
|
|
|
2807 }
|
|
|
2808
|
|
|
2809 /*ARGSUSED0*/
|
|
|
2810 static void
|
|
|
2811 drawarea_style_set_cb(GtkWidget *widget,
|
|
|
2812 GtkStyle *previous_style,
|
|
|
2813 gpointer data)
|
|
|
2814 {
|
|
|
2815 gui_mch_new_colors();
|
|
|
2816 }
|
|
|
2817
|
|
|
2818 /*
|
|
|
2819 * Callback routine for the "delete_event" signal on the toplevel window.
|
|
|
2820 * Tries to vim gracefully, or refuses to exit with changed buffers.
|
|
|
2821 */
|
|
|
2822 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
2823 static gint
|
|
|
2824 delete_event_cb(GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventAny *event, gpointer data)
|
|
|
2825 {
|
|
|
2826 gui_shell_closed();
|
|
|
2827 return TRUE;
|
|
|
2828 }
|
|
|
2829
|
|
685
|
2830 #if defined(FEAT_MENU) || defined(FEAT_TOOLBAR) || defined(FEAT_GUI_TABLINE)
|
|
|
2831 static int
|
|
|
2832 get_item_dimensions(GtkWidget *widget, GtkOrientation orientation)
|
|
|
2833 {
|
|
|
2834 GtkOrientation item_orientation = GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL;
|
|
|
2835
|
|
|
2836 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME
|
|
|
2837 if (using_gnome && widget != NULL)
|
|
|
2838 {
|
|
|
2839 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
791
|
2840 GtkWidget *parent;
|
|
685
|
2841 BonoboDockItem *dockitem;
|
|
|
2842
|
|
791
|
2843 parent = gtk_widget_get_parent(widget);
|
|
|
2844 if (G_TYPE_FROM_INSTANCE(parent) == BONOBO_TYPE_DOCK_ITEM)
|
|
|
2845 {
|
|
|
2846 /* Only menu & toolbar are dock items. Could tabline be?
|
|
|
2847 * Seem to be only the 2 defined in GNOME */
|
|
|
2848 widget = parent;
|
|
|
2849 dockitem = BONOBO_DOCK_ITEM(widget);
|
|
|
2850
|
|
|
2851 if (dockitem == NULL || dockitem->is_floating)
|
|
|
2852 return 0;
|
|
|
2853 item_orientation = bonobo_dock_item_get_orientation(dockitem);
|
|
|
2854 }
|
|
685
|
2855 # else
|
|
|
2856 GnomeDockItem *dockitem;
|
|
|
2857
|
|
|
2858 widget = widget->parent;
|
|
|
2859 dockitem = GNOME_DOCK_ITEM(widget);
|
|
|
2860
|
|
|
2861 if (dockitem == NULL || dockitem->is_floating)
|
|
|
2862 return 0;
|
|
|
2863 item_orientation = gnome_dock_item_get_orientation(dockitem);
|
|
|
2864 # endif
|
|
|
2865 }
|
|
|
2866 #endif
|
|
|
2867 if (widget != NULL
|
|
|
2868 && item_orientation == orientation
|
|
|
2869 && GTK_WIDGET_REALIZED(widget)
|
|
|
2870 && GTK_WIDGET_VISIBLE(widget))
|
|
|
2871 {
|
|
|
2872 if (orientation == GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL)
|
|
|
2873 return widget->allocation.height;
|
|
|
2874 else
|
|
|
2875 return widget->allocation.width;
|
|
|
2876 }
|
|
|
2877 return 0;
|
|
|
2878 }
|
|
|
2879 #endif
|
|
|
2880
|
|
|
2881 static int
|
|
|
2882 get_menu_tool_width(void)
|
|
|
2883 {
|
|
|
2884 int width = 0;
|
|
|
2885
|
|
|
2886 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME /* these are never vertical without GNOME */
|
|
|
2887 # ifdef FEAT_MENU
|
|
|
2888 width += get_item_dimensions(gui.menubar, GTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICAL);
|
|
|
2889 # endif
|
|
|
2890 # ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR
|
|
|
2891 width += get_item_dimensions(gui.toolbar, GTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICAL);
|
|
|
2892 # endif
|
|
|
2893 # ifdef FEAT_GUI_TABLINE
|
|
782
|
2894 if (gui.tabline != NULL)
|
|
|
2895 width += get_item_dimensions(gui.tabline, GTK_ORIENTATION_VERTICAL);
|
|
685
|
2896 # endif
|
|
|
2897 #endif
|
|
|
2898
|
|
|
2899 return width;
|
|
|
2900 }
|
|
|
2901
|
|
|
2902 static int
|
|
|
2903 get_menu_tool_height(void)
|
|
|
2904 {
|
|
|
2905 int height = 0;
|
|
|
2906
|
|
|
2907 #ifdef FEAT_MENU
|
|
|
2908 height += get_item_dimensions(gui.menubar, GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL);
|
|
|
2909 #endif
|
|
|
2910 #ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR
|
|
|
2911 height += get_item_dimensions(gui.toolbar, GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL);
|
|
|
2912 #endif
|
|
|
2913 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_TABLINE
|
|
782
|
2914 if (gui.tabline != NULL)
|
|
|
2915 height += get_item_dimensions(gui.tabline, GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL);
|
|
685
|
2916 #endif
|
|
|
2917
|
|
|
2918 return height;
|
|
|
2919 }
|
|
|
2920
|
|
791
|
2921 /* This controls whether we can set the real window hints at
|
|
|
2922 * start-up when in a GtkPlug.
|
|
|
2923 * 0 = normal processing (default)
|
|
|
2924 * 1 = init. hints set, no-one's tried to reset since last check
|
|
|
2925 * 2 = init. hints set, attempt made to change hints
|
|
|
2926 */
|
|
|
2927 static int init_window_hints_state = 0;
|
|
|
2928
|
|
685
|
2929 static void
|
|
791
|
2930 update_window_manager_hints(int force_width, int force_height)
|
|
685
|
2931 {
|
|
|
2932 static int old_width = 0;
|
|
|
2933 static int old_height = 0;
|
|
791
|
2934 static int old_min_width = 0;
|
|
|
2935 static int old_min_height = 0;
|
|
685
|
2936 static int old_char_width = 0;
|
|
|
2937 static int old_char_height = 0;
|
|
|
2938
|
|
|
2939 int width;
|
|
|
2940 int height;
|
|
791
|
2941 int min_width;
|
|
|
2942 int min_height;
|
|
|
2943
|
|
|
2944 /* At start-up, don't try to set the hints until the initial
|
|
|
2945 * values have been used (those that dictate our initial size)
|
|
|
2946 * Let forced (i.e., correct) values thruogh always.
|
|
|
2947 */
|
|
|
2948 if (!(force_width && force_height) && init_window_hints_state > 0)
|
|
|
2949 {
|
|
|
2950 /* Don't do it! */
|
|
|
2951 init_window_hints_state = 2;
|
|
|
2952 return;
|
|
|
2953 }
|
|
685
|
2954
|
|
|
2955 /* This also needs to be done when the main window isn't there yet,
|
|
|
2956 * otherwise the hints don't work. */
|
|
|
2957 width = gui_get_base_width();
|
|
|
2958 height = gui_get_base_height();
|
|
|
2959 # ifdef FEAT_MENU
|
|
|
2960 height += tabline_height() * gui.char_height;
|
|
|
2961 # endif
|
|
|
2962 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
2963 width += get_menu_tool_width();
|
|
|
2964 height += get_menu_tool_height();
|
|
|
2965 # endif
|
|
|
2966
|
|
791
|
2967 /* GtkSockets use GtkPlug's [gui,mainwin] min-size hints to determine
|
|
|
2968 * their actual widget size. When we set our size ourselve (e.g.,
|
|
|
2969 * 'set columns=' or init. -geom) we briefly set the min. to the size
|
|
|
2970 * we wish to be instead of the legitimate minimum so that we actually
|
|
|
2971 * resize correctly.
|
|
|
2972 */
|
|
|
2973 if (force_width && force_height)
|
|
|
2974 {
|
|
|
2975 min_width = force_width;
|
|
|
2976 min_height = force_height;
|
|
|
2977 }
|
|
|
2978 else
|
|
|
2979 {
|
|
|
2980 min_width = width + MIN_COLUMNS * gui.char_width;
|
|
|
2981 min_height = height + MIN_LINES * gui.char_height;
|
|
|
2982 }
|
|
|
2983
|
|
685
|
2984 /* Avoid an expose event when the size didn't change. */
|
|
|
2985 if (width != old_width
|
|
|
2986 || height != old_height
|
|
791
|
2987 || min_width != old_min_width
|
|
|
2988 || min_height != old_min_height
|
|
685
|
2989 || gui.char_width != old_char_width
|
|
|
2990 || gui.char_height != old_char_height)
|
|
|
2991 {
|
|
|
2992 GdkGeometry geometry;
|
|
|
2993 GdkWindowHints geometry_mask;
|
|
|
2994
|
|
|
2995 geometry.width_inc = gui.char_width;
|
|
|
2996 geometry.height_inc = gui.char_height;
|
|
|
2997 geometry.base_width = width;
|
|
|
2998 geometry.base_height = height;
|
|
791
|
2999 geometry.min_width = min_width;
|
|
|
3000 geometry.min_height = min_height;
|
|
685
|
3001 geometry_mask = GDK_HINT_BASE_SIZE|GDK_HINT_RESIZE_INC
|
|
|
3002 |GDK_HINT_MIN_SIZE;
|
|
|
3003 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3004 /* Using gui.formwin as geometry widget doesn't work as expected
|
|
|
3005 * with GTK+ 2 -- dunno why. Presumably all the resizing hacks
|
|
|
3006 * in Vim confuse GTK+. */
|
|
|
3007 gtk_window_set_geometry_hints(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), gui.mainwin,
|
|
|
3008 &geometry, geometry_mask);
|
|
|
3009 # else
|
|
|
3010 gtk_window_set_geometry_hints(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), gui.formwin,
|
|
|
3011 &geometry, geometry_mask);
|
|
|
3012 # endif
|
|
791
|
3013 old_width = width;
|
|
|
3014 old_height = height;
|
|
|
3015 old_min_width = min_width;
|
|
|
3016 old_min_height = min_height;
|
|
|
3017 old_char_width = gui.char_width;
|
|
|
3018 old_char_height = gui.char_height;
|
|
685
|
3019 }
|
|
|
3020 }
|
|
|
3021
|
|
7
|
3022 #ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR
|
|
|
3023
|
|
|
3024 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3025 /*
|
|
|
3026 * This extra effort wouldn't be necessary if we only used stock icons in the
|
|
|
3027 * toolbar, as we do for all builtin icons. But user-defined toolbar icons
|
|
|
3028 * shouldn't be treated differently, thus we do need this.
|
|
|
3029 */
|
|
|
3030 static void
|
|
|
3031 icon_size_changed_foreach(GtkWidget *widget, gpointer user_data)
|
|
|
3032 {
|
|
|
3033 if (GTK_IS_IMAGE(widget))
|
|
|
3034 {
|
|
|
3035 GtkImage *image = (GtkImage *)widget;
|
|
|
3036
|
|
|
3037 /* User-defined icons are stored in a GtkIconSet */
|
|
|
3038 if (gtk_image_get_storage_type(image) == GTK_IMAGE_ICON_SET)
|
|
|
3039 {
|
|
|
3040 GtkIconSet *icon_set;
|
|
|
3041 GtkIconSize icon_size;
|
|
|
3042
|
|
|
3043 gtk_image_get_icon_set(image, &icon_set, &icon_size);
|
|
|
3044 icon_size = (GtkIconSize)(long)user_data;
|
|
|
3045
|
|
|
3046 gtk_icon_set_ref(icon_set);
|
|
|
3047 gtk_image_set_from_icon_set(image, icon_set, icon_size);
|
|
|
3048 gtk_icon_set_unref(icon_set);
|
|
|
3049 }
|
|
|
3050 }
|
|
|
3051 else if (GTK_IS_CONTAINER(widget))
|
|
|
3052 {
|
|
|
3053 gtk_container_foreach((GtkContainer *)widget,
|
|
|
3054 &icon_size_changed_foreach,
|
|
|
3055 user_data);
|
|
|
3056 }
|
|
|
3057 }
|
|
|
3058 # endif /* HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
3059
|
|
|
3060 static void
|
|
|
3061 set_toolbar_style(GtkToolbar *toolbar)
|
|
|
3062 {
|
|
|
3063 GtkToolbarStyle style;
|
|
|
3064 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3065 GtkIconSize size;
|
|
|
3066 GtkIconSize oldsize;
|
|
|
3067 # endif
|
|
|
3068
|
|
|
3069 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3070 if ((toolbar_flags & (TOOLBAR_TEXT | TOOLBAR_ICONS | TOOLBAR_HORIZ))
|
|
|
3071 == (TOOLBAR_TEXT | TOOLBAR_ICONS | TOOLBAR_HORIZ))
|
|
|
3072 style = GTK_TOOLBAR_BOTH_HORIZ;
|
|
|
3073 else
|
|
|
3074 # endif
|
|
|
3075 if ((toolbar_flags & (TOOLBAR_TEXT | TOOLBAR_ICONS))
|
|
|
3076 == (TOOLBAR_TEXT | TOOLBAR_ICONS))
|
|
|
3077 style = GTK_TOOLBAR_BOTH;
|
|
|
3078 else if (toolbar_flags & TOOLBAR_TEXT)
|
|
|
3079 style = GTK_TOOLBAR_TEXT;
|
|
|
3080 else
|
|
|
3081 style = GTK_TOOLBAR_ICONS;
|
|
|
3082
|
|
|
3083 gtk_toolbar_set_style(toolbar, style);
|
|
|
3084 gtk_toolbar_set_tooltips(toolbar, (toolbar_flags & TOOLBAR_TOOLTIPS) != 0);
|
|
|
3085
|
|
|
3086 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3087 switch (tbis_flags)
|
|
|
3088 {
|
|
|
3089 case TBIS_TINY: size = GTK_ICON_SIZE_MENU; break;
|
|
|
3090 case TBIS_SMALL: size = GTK_ICON_SIZE_SMALL_TOOLBAR; break;
|
|
|
3091 case TBIS_MEDIUM: size = GTK_ICON_SIZE_BUTTON; break;
|
|
|
3092 case TBIS_LARGE: size = GTK_ICON_SIZE_LARGE_TOOLBAR; break;
|
|
|
3093 default: size = GTK_ICON_SIZE_INVALID; break;
|
|
|
3094 }
|
|
|
3095 oldsize = gtk_toolbar_get_icon_size(toolbar);
|
|
|
3096
|
|
|
3097 if (size == GTK_ICON_SIZE_INVALID)
|
|
|
3098 {
|
|
|
3099 /* Let global user preferences decide the icon size. */
|
|
|
3100 gtk_toolbar_unset_icon_size(toolbar);
|
|
|
3101 size = gtk_toolbar_get_icon_size(toolbar);
|
|
|
3102 }
|
|
|
3103 if (size != oldsize)
|
|
|
3104 {
|
|
|
3105 gtk_container_foreach(GTK_CONTAINER(toolbar),
|
|
|
3106 &icon_size_changed_foreach,
|
|
|
3107 GINT_TO_POINTER((int)size));
|
|
|
3108 }
|
|
|
3109 gtk_toolbar_set_icon_size(toolbar, size);
|
|
|
3110 # endif
|
|
|
3111 }
|
|
|
3112
|
|
|
3113 #endif /* FEAT_TOOLBAR */
|
|
|
3114
|
|
685
|
3115 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_TABLINE) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
3116 static int ignore_tabline_evt = FALSE;
|
|
689
|
3117 static GtkWidget *tabline_menu;
|
|
|
3118 static int clicked_page; /* page clicked in tab line */
|
|
|
3119
|
|
|
3120 /*
|
|
|
3121 * Handle selecting an item in the tab line popup menu.
|
|
|
3122 */
|
|
|
3123 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
3124 static void
|
|
|
3125 tabline_menu_handler(GtkMenuItem *item, gpointer user_data)
|
|
|
3126 {
|
|
|
3127 char_u string[3];
|
|
|
3128
|
|
|
3129 /* Add the string cmd into input buffer */
|
|
|
3130 string[0] = CSI;
|
|
|
3131 string[1] = KS_TABMENU;
|
|
|
3132 string[2] = KE_FILLER;
|
|
|
3133 add_to_input_buf(string, 3);
|
|
|
3134 string[0] = clicked_page;
|
|
|
3135 string[1] = (char_u)(long)user_data;
|
|
|
3136 add_to_input_buf_csi(string, 2);
|
|
|
3137
|
|
|
3138 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
3139 gtk_main_quit();
|
|
|
3140 }
|
|
|
3141
|
|
|
3142 /*
|
|
|
3143 * Create a menu for the tab line.
|
|
|
3144 */
|
|
|
3145 static GtkWidget *
|
|
|
3146 create_tabline_menu(void)
|
|
|
3147 {
|
|
|
3148 GtkWidget *menu, *item;
|
|
|
3149
|
|
|
3150 menu = gtk_menu_new();
|
|
|
3151
|
|
|
3152 item = gtk_menu_item_new_with_label(_("Close"));
|
|
|
3153 gtk_widget_show(item);
|
|
|
3154 gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(menu), item);
|
|
|
3155 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(item), "activate",
|
|
|
3156 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(tabline_menu_handler),
|
|
|
3157 (gpointer)TABLINE_MENU_CLOSE);
|
|
|
3158
|
|
|
3159 item = gtk_menu_item_new_with_label(_("New tab"));
|
|
|
3160 gtk_widget_show(item);
|
|
|
3161 gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(menu), item);
|
|
|
3162 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(item), "activate",
|
|
|
3163 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(tabline_menu_handler),
|
|
|
3164 (gpointer)TABLINE_MENU_NEW);
|
|
|
3165
|
|
|
3166 item = gtk_menu_item_new_with_label(_("Open Tab..."));
|
|
|
3167 gtk_widget_show(item);
|
|
|
3168 gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(menu), item);
|
|
|
3169 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(item), "activate",
|
|
|
3170 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(tabline_menu_handler),
|
|
|
3171 (gpointer)TABLINE_MENU_OPEN);
|
|
|
3172
|
|
|
3173 return menu;
|
|
|
3174 }
|
|
|
3175
|
|
|
3176 static gboolean
|
|
|
3177 on_tabline_menu(GtkWidget *widget, GdkEvent *event)
|
|
|
3178 {
|
|
|
3179 /* Was this button press event ? */
|
|
|
3180 if (event->type == GDK_BUTTON_PRESS)
|
|
|
3181 {
|
|
|
3182 GdkEventButton *bevent = (GdkEventButton *)event;
|
|
|
3183 int x = bevent->x;
|
|
|
3184 GtkWidget *page;
|
|
|
3185 GtkWidget *label;
|
|
|
3186
|
|
|
3187 /* Find out where the click was. */
|
|
|
3188 for (clicked_page = 1; ; ++clicked_page)
|
|
|
3189 {
|
|
|
3190 page = gtk_notebook_get_nth_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline),
|
|
|
3191 clicked_page - 1);
|
|
|
3192 if (page == NULL)
|
|
|
3193 {
|
|
|
3194 /* Past all the labels, return zero. */
|
|
|
3195 clicked_page = 0;
|
|
|
3196 break;
|
|
|
3197 }
|
|
|
3198 label = gtk_notebook_get_tab_label(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), page);
|
|
|
3199 /* The label size apparently doesn't include the spacing, estimate
|
|
|
3200 * it by the page position. */
|
|
|
3201 if (page->allocation.x * 2 + label->allocation.x
|
|
|
3202 + label->allocation.width + 1>= x)
|
|
|
3203 break;
|
|
|
3204 }
|
|
|
3205
|
|
|
3206 /* If the event was generated for 3rd button popup the menu. */
|
|
|
3207 if (bevent->button == 3)
|
|
|
3208 {
|
|
|
3209 gtk_menu_popup(GTK_MENU(widget), NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL,
|
|
|
3210 bevent->button, bevent->time);
|
|
|
3211 /* We handled the event. */
|
|
|
3212 return TRUE;
|
|
|
3213 }
|
|
|
3214 else if (bevent->button == 1 && clicked_page == 0)
|
|
693
|
3215 {
|
|
689
|
3216 /* Click after all tabs moves to next tab page. */
|
|
693
|
3217 if (send_tabline_event(0) && gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
3218 gtk_main_quit();
|
|
|
3219 }
|
|
689
|
3220 }
|
|
|
3221 /* We didn't handle the event. */
|
|
|
3222 return FALSE;
|
|
|
3223 }
|
|
685
|
3224
|
|
|
3225 /*
|
|
|
3226 * Handle selecting one of the tabs.
|
|
|
3227 */
|
|
|
3228 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
3229 static void
|
|
|
3230 on_select_tab(
|
|
|
3231 GtkNotebook *notebook,
|
|
|
3232 GtkNotebookPage *page,
|
|
|
3233 gint index,
|
|
|
3234 gpointer data)
|
|
|
3235 {
|
|
|
3236 if (!ignore_tabline_evt)
|
|
693
|
3237 {
|
|
|
3238 if (send_tabline_event(index + 1) && gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
3239 gtk_main_quit();
|
|
|
3240 }
|
|
685
|
3241 }
|
|
|
3242
|
|
714
|
3243 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3244 static int showing_tabline = 0;
|
|
|
3245 #endif
|
|
|
3246
|
|
685
|
3247 /*
|
|
|
3248 * Show or hide the tabline.
|
|
|
3249 */
|
|
|
3250 void
|
|
|
3251 gui_mch_show_tabline(int showit)
|
|
|
3252 {
|
|
|
3253 if (gui.tabline == NULL)
|
|
|
3254 return;
|
|
|
3255
|
|
714
|
3256 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3257 /* gtk_notebook_get_show_tabs does not exist in gtk+-1.2.10 */
|
|
685
|
3258 if (!showit != !gtk_notebook_get_show_tabs(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline)))
|
|
714
|
3259 #else
|
|
|
3260 if (!showit != !showing_tabline)
|
|
|
3261 #endif
|
|
685
|
3262 {
|
|
708
|
3263 /* Note: this may cause a resize event */
|
|
685
|
3264 gtk_notebook_set_show_tabs(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), showit);
|
|
791
|
3265 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0);
|
|
714
|
3266 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3267 showing_tabline = showit;
|
|
|
3268 #endif
|
|
685
|
3269 }
|
|
|
3270 }
|
|
|
3271
|
|
|
3272 /*
|
|
708
|
3273 * Return TRUE when tabline is displayed.
|
|
|
3274 */
|
|
|
3275 int
|
|
|
3276 gui_mch_showing_tabline(void)
|
|
|
3277 {
|
|
|
3278 return gui.tabline != NULL
|
|
714
|
3279 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3280 /* gtk_notebook_get_show_tabs does not exist in gtk+-1.2.10 */
|
|
|
3281 && gtk_notebook_get_show_tabs(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline))
|
|
|
3282 #else
|
|
|
3283 && showing_tabline
|
|
|
3284 #endif
|
|
|
3285 ;
|
|
708
|
3286 }
|
|
|
3287
|
|
|
3288 /*
|
|
685
|
3289 * Update the labels of the tabline.
|
|
|
3290 */
|
|
|
3291 void
|
|
|
3292 gui_mch_update_tabline(void)
|
|
|
3293 {
|
|
|
3294 GtkWidget *page;
|
|
|
3295 GtkWidget *label;
|
|
|
3296 tabpage_T *tp;
|
|
|
3297 int nr = 0;
|
|
|
3298 int curtabidx = 0;
|
|
|
3299
|
|
|
3300 if (gui.tabline == NULL)
|
|
|
3301 return;
|
|
|
3302
|
|
|
3303 ignore_tabline_evt = TRUE;
|
|
|
3304
|
|
|
3305 /* Add a label for each tab page. They all contain the same text area. */
|
|
|
3306 for (tp = first_tabpage; tp != NULL; tp = tp->tp_next, ++nr)
|
|
|
3307 {
|
|
|
3308 if (tp == curtab)
|
|
|
3309 curtabidx = nr;
|
|
|
3310
|
|
|
3311 page = gtk_notebook_get_nth_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), nr);
|
|
|
3312 if (page == NULL)
|
|
|
3313 {
|
|
|
3314 /* Add notebook page */
|
|
|
3315 page = gtk_vbox_new(FALSE, 0);
|
|
|
3316 gtk_widget_show(page);
|
|
|
3317 label = gtk_label_new("-Empty-");
|
|
|
3318 gtk_widget_show(label);
|
|
|
3319 gtk_notebook_insert_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline),
|
|
|
3320 page,
|
|
|
3321 label,
|
|
|
3322 nr++);
|
|
|
3323 }
|
|
|
3324
|
|
|
3325 get_tabline_label(tp);
|
|
|
3326 gtk_notebook_set_tab_label_text(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), page,
|
|
|
3327 (const gchar *)NameBuff);
|
|
|
3328 }
|
|
|
3329
|
|
|
3330 /* Remove any old labels. */
|
|
|
3331 while (gtk_notebook_get_nth_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), nr) != NULL)
|
|
|
3332 gtk_notebook_remove_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), nr);
|
|
|
3333
|
|
|
3334 if (gtk_notebook_current_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline)) != curtabidx)
|
|
|
3335 gtk_notebook_set_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), curtabidx);
|
|
|
3336
|
|
|
3337 ignore_tabline_evt = FALSE;
|
|
|
3338 }
|
|
|
3339
|
|
|
3340 /*
|
|
|
3341 * Set the current tab to "nr". First tab is 1.
|
|
|
3342 */
|
|
|
3343 void
|
|
|
3344 gui_mch_set_curtab(nr)
|
|
|
3345 int nr;
|
|
|
3346 {
|
|
|
3347 if (gui.tabline == NULL)
|
|
|
3348 return;
|
|
|
3349
|
|
|
3350 ignore_tabline_evt = TRUE;
|
|
|
3351 if (gtk_notebook_current_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline)) != nr - 1)
|
|
|
3352 gtk_notebook_set_page(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), nr - 1);
|
|
|
3353 ignore_tabline_evt = FALSE;
|
|
|
3354 }
|
|
|
3355
|
|
|
3356 #endif /* FEAT_GUI_TABLINE */
|
|
|
3357
|
|
7
|
3358 /*
|
|
|
3359 * Initialize the GUI. Create all the windows, set up all the callbacks etc.
|
|
|
3360 * Returns OK for success, FAIL when the GUI can't be started.
|
|
|
3361 */
|
|
|
3362 int
|
|
|
3363 gui_mch_init(void)
|
|
|
3364 {
|
|
|
3365 GtkWidget *vbox;
|
|
|
3366
|
|
|
3367 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME
|
|
|
3368 /* Initialize the GNOME libraries. gnome_program_init()/gnome_init()
|
|
|
3369 * exits on failure, but that's a non-issue because we already called
|
|
|
3370 * gtk_init_check() in gui_mch_init_check(). */
|
|
|
3371 if (using_gnome)
|
|
|
3372 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3373 gnome_program_init(VIMPACKAGE, VIM_VERSION_SHORT,
|
|
|
3374 LIBGNOMEUI_MODULE, gui_argc, gui_argv, NULL);
|
|
|
3375 # else
|
|
|
3376 gnome_init(VIMPACKAGE, VIM_VERSION_SHORT, gui_argc, gui_argv);
|
|
|
3377 # endif
|
|
|
3378 #endif
|
|
|
3379 vim_free(gui_argv);
|
|
|
3380 gui_argv = NULL;
|
|
|
3381
|
|
|
3382 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3383 # if GLIB_CHECK_VERSION(2,1,3)
|
|
|
3384 /* Set the human-readable application name */
|
|
|
3385 g_set_application_name("Vim");
|
|
|
3386 # endif
|
|
|
3387 /*
|
|
|
3388 * Force UTF-8 output no matter what the value of 'encoding' is.
|
|
|
3389 * did_set_string_option() in option.c prohibits changing 'termencoding'
|
|
|
3390 * to something else than UTF-8 if the GUI is in use.
|
|
|
3391 */
|
|
|
3392 set_option_value((char_u *)"termencoding", 0L, (char_u *)"utf-8", 0);
|
|
|
3393
|
|
|
3394 # ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR
|
|
|
3395 gui_gtk_register_stock_icons();
|
|
|
3396 # endif
|
|
|
3397 /* FIXME: Need to install the classic icons and a gtkrc.classic file.
|
|
|
3398 * The hard part is deciding install locations and the Makefile magic. */
|
|
|
3399 # if 0
|
|
|
3400 gtk_rc_parse("gtkrc");
|
|
|
3401 # endif
|
|
|
3402 #endif
|
|
|
3403
|
|
|
3404 /* Initialize values */
|
|
|
3405 gui.border_width = 2;
|
|
|
3406 gui.scrollbar_width = SB_DEFAULT_WIDTH;
|
|
|
3407 gui.scrollbar_height = SB_DEFAULT_WIDTH;
|
|
136
|
3408 /* LINTED: avoid warning: conversion to 'unsigned long' */
|
|
7
|
3409 gui.fgcolor = g_new0(GdkColor, 1);
|
|
136
|
3410 /* LINTED: avoid warning: conversion to 'unsigned long' */
|
|
7
|
3411 gui.bgcolor = g_new0(GdkColor, 1);
|
|
207
|
3412 /* LINTED: avoid warning: conversion to 'unsigned long' */
|
|
|
3413 gui.spcolor = g_new0(GdkColor, 1);
|
|
7
|
3414
|
|
|
3415 /* Initialise atoms */
|
|
|
3416 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
3417 utf8_string_atom = gdk_atom_intern("UTF8_STRING", FALSE);
|
|
|
3418 #endif
|
|
|
3419 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3420 compound_text_atom = gdk_atom_intern("COMPOUND_TEXT", FALSE);
|
|
|
3421 text_atom = gdk_atom_intern("TEXT", FALSE);
|
|
|
3422 #endif
|
|
|
3423
|
|
|
3424 /* Set default foreground and background colors. */
|
|
|
3425 gui.norm_pixel = gui.def_norm_pixel;
|
|
|
3426 gui.back_pixel = gui.def_back_pixel;
|
|
|
3427
|
|
|
3428 if (gtk_socket_id != 0)
|
|
|
3429 {
|
|
|
3430 GtkWidget *plug;
|
|
|
3431
|
|
|
3432 /* Use GtkSocket from another app. */
|
|
|
3433 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD
|
|
|
3434 plug = gtk_plug_new_for_display(gdk_display_get_default(),
|
|
|
3435 gtk_socket_id);
|
|
|
3436 #else
|
|
|
3437 plug = gtk_plug_new(gtk_socket_id);
|
|
|
3438 #endif
|
|
|
3439 if (plug != NULL && GTK_PLUG(plug)->socket_window != NULL)
|
|
|
3440 {
|
|
|
3441 gui.mainwin = plug;
|
|
|
3442 }
|
|
|
3443 else
|
|
|
3444 {
|
|
|
3445 g_warning("Connection to GTK+ socket (ID %u) failed",
|
|
|
3446 (unsigned int)gtk_socket_id);
|
|
|
3447 /* Pretend we never wanted it if it failed (get own window) */
|
|
|
3448 gtk_socket_id = 0;
|
|
|
3449 }
|
|
|
3450 }
|
|
|
3451
|
|
|
3452 if (gtk_socket_id == 0)
|
|
|
3453 {
|
|
|
3454 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME
|
|
|
3455 if (using_gnome)
|
|
|
3456 {
|
|
|
3457 gui.mainwin = gnome_app_new("Vim", NULL);
|
|
|
3458 # ifdef USE_XSMP
|
|
|
3459 /* Use the GNOME save-yourself functionality now. */
|
|
|
3460 xsmp_close();
|
|
|
3461 # endif
|
|
|
3462 }
|
|
|
3463 else
|
|
|
3464 #endif
|
|
|
3465 gui.mainwin = gtk_window_new(GTK_WINDOW_TOPLEVEL);
|
|
|
3466 }
|
|
|
3467
|
|
|
3468 gtk_widget_set_name(gui.mainwin, "vim-main-window");
|
|
|
3469
|
|
|
3470 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3471 /* Create the PangoContext used for drawing all text. */
|
|
|
3472 gui.text_context = gtk_widget_create_pango_context(gui.mainwin);
|
|
|
3473 pango_context_set_base_dir(gui.text_context, PANGO_DIRECTION_LTR);
|
|
|
3474 #endif
|
|
|
3475
|
|
|
3476 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3477 gtk_window_set_policy(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), TRUE, TRUE, TRUE);
|
|
|
3478 #endif
|
|
|
3479 gtk_container_border_width(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.mainwin), 0);
|
|
|
3480 gtk_widget_add_events(gui.mainwin, GDK_VISIBILITY_NOTIFY_MASK);
|
|
|
3481
|
|
|
3482 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "delete_event",
|
|
|
3483 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(&delete_event_cb), NULL);
|
|
|
3484
|
|
|
3485 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "realize",
|
|
|
3486 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(&mainwin_realize), NULL);
|
|
|
3487 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD
|
|
|
3488 g_signal_connect(G_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "screen_changed",
|
|
|
3489 G_CALLBACK(&mainwin_screen_changed_cb), NULL);
|
|
|
3490 #endif
|
|
|
3491 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3492 gui.accel_group = gtk_accel_group_new();
|
|
|
3493 gtk_window_add_accel_group(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), gui.accel_group);
|
|
|
3494 #else
|
|
|
3495 gui.accel_group = gtk_accel_group_get_default();
|
|
|
3496 #endif
|
|
|
3497
|
|
685
|
3498 /* A vertical box holds the menubar, toolbar and main text window. */
|
|
7
|
3499 vbox = gtk_vbox_new(FALSE, 0);
|
|
|
3500
|
|
|
3501 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME
|
|
|
3502 if (using_gnome)
|
|
|
3503 {
|
|
|
3504 # if defined(HAVE_GTK2) && defined(FEAT_MENU)
|
|
|
3505 /* automagically restore menubar/toolbar placement */
|
|
|
3506 gnome_app_enable_layout_config(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin), TRUE);
|
|
|
3507 # endif
|
|
|
3508 gnome_app_set_contents(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin), vbox);
|
|
|
3509 }
|
|
|
3510 else
|
|
|
3511 #endif
|
|
|
3512 {
|
|
|
3513 gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.mainwin), vbox);
|
|
|
3514 gtk_widget_show(vbox);
|
|
|
3515 }
|
|
|
3516
|
|
|
3517 #ifdef FEAT_MENU
|
|
|
3518 /*
|
|
|
3519 * Create the menubar and handle
|
|
|
3520 */
|
|
|
3521 gui.menubar = gtk_menu_bar_new();
|
|
|
3522 gtk_widget_set_name(gui.menubar, "vim-menubar");
|
|
|
3523
|
|
36
|
3524 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3525 /* Avoid that GTK takes <F10> away from us. */
|
|
|
3526 {
|
|
|
3527 GtkSettings *gtk_settings;
|
|
|
3528
|
|
|
3529 gtk_settings = gtk_settings_get_for_screen(gdk_screen_get_default());
|
|
|
3530 g_object_set(gtk_settings, "gtk-menu-bar-accel", NULL, NULL);
|
|
|
3531 }
|
|
|
3532 # endif
|
|
|
3533
|
|
|
3534
|
|
7
|
3535 # ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME
|
|
|
3536 if (using_gnome)
|
|
|
3537 {
|
|
|
3538 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3539 BonoboDockItem *dockitem;
|
|
|
3540
|
|
|
3541 gnome_app_set_menus(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin), GTK_MENU_BAR(gui.menubar));
|
|
|
3542 dockitem = gnome_app_get_dock_item_by_name(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin),
|
|
|
3543 GNOME_APP_MENUBAR_NAME);
|
|
795
|
3544 // bonobo_dock_item_set_behavior(dockitem,
|
|
|
3545 // BONOBO_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_NEVER_FLOATING);
|
|
7
|
3546 gui.menubar_h = GTK_WIDGET(dockitem);
|
|
|
3547 # else
|
|
|
3548 gui.menubar_h = gnome_dock_item_new("VimMainMenu",
|
|
|
3549 GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_EXCLUSIVE |
|
|
|
3550 GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_NEVER_VERTICAL);
|
|
|
3551 gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.menubar_h), gui.menubar);
|
|
|
3552
|
|
|
3553 gnome_dock_add_item(GNOME_DOCK(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin)->dock),
|
|
|
3554 GNOME_DOCK_ITEM(gui.menubar_h),
|
|
|
3555 GNOME_DOCK_TOP, /* placement */
|
|
|
3556 1, /* band_num */
|
|
|
3557 0, /* band_position */
|
|
|
3558 0, /* offset */
|
|
|
3559 TRUE);
|
|
|
3560 gtk_widget_show(gui.menubar);
|
|
|
3561 # endif
|
|
|
3562 }
|
|
|
3563 else
|
|
|
3564 # endif /* FEAT_GUI_GNOME */
|
|
|
3565 {
|
|
|
3566 if (vim_strchr(p_go, GO_MENUS) != NULL)
|
|
|
3567 gtk_widget_show(gui.menubar);
|
|
|
3568 gtk_box_pack_start(GTK_BOX(vbox), gui.menubar, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
|
|
|
3569 }
|
|
|
3570 #endif /* FEAT_MENU */
|
|
|
3571
|
|
|
3572 #ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR
|
|
|
3573 /*
|
|
|
3574 * Create the toolbar and handle
|
|
|
3575 */
|
|
|
3576 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3577 /* some aesthetics on the toolbar */
|
|
|
3578 gtk_rc_parse_string(
|
|
|
3579 "style \"vim-toolbar-style\" {\n"
|
|
|
3580 " GtkToolbar::button_relief = GTK_RELIEF_NONE\n"
|
|
|
3581 "}\n"
|
|
|
3582 "widget \"*.vim-toolbar\" style \"vim-toolbar-style\"\n");
|
|
|
3583 gui.toolbar = gtk_toolbar_new();
|
|
|
3584 gtk_widget_set_name(gui.toolbar, "vim-toolbar");
|
|
|
3585 # else
|
|
|
3586 gui.toolbar = gtk_toolbar_new(GTK_ORIENTATION_HORIZONTAL,
|
|
|
3587 GTK_TOOLBAR_ICONS);
|
|
|
3588 gtk_toolbar_set_button_relief(GTK_TOOLBAR(gui.toolbar), GTK_RELIEF_NONE);
|
|
|
3589 # endif
|
|
|
3590 set_toolbar_style(GTK_TOOLBAR(gui.toolbar));
|
|
|
3591
|
|
|
3592 # ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME
|
|
|
3593 if (using_gnome)
|
|
|
3594 {
|
|
|
3595 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3596 BonoboDockItem *dockitem;
|
|
|
3597
|
|
|
3598 gnome_app_set_toolbar(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin), GTK_TOOLBAR(gui.toolbar));
|
|
|
3599 dockitem = gnome_app_get_dock_item_by_name(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin),
|
|
|
3600 GNOME_APP_TOOLBAR_NAME);
|
|
|
3601 gui.toolbar_h = GTK_WIDGET(dockitem);
|
|
795
|
3602 /* When the toolbar is floating it gets stuck. So long as that isn't
|
|
|
3603 * fixed let's disallow floating. Also changes it appearance... */
|
|
|
3604 bonobo_dock_item_set_behavior(dockitem,
|
|
|
3605 BONOBO_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_NEVER_FLOATING);
|
|
7
|
3606 gtk_container_set_border_width(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.toolbar), 0);
|
|
|
3607 # else
|
|
|
3608 GtkWidget *dockitem;
|
|
|
3609
|
|
|
3610 dockitem = gnome_dock_item_new("VimToolBar",
|
|
|
3611 GNOME_DOCK_ITEM_BEH_EXCLUSIVE);
|
|
|
3612 gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(dockitem), GTK_WIDGET(gui.toolbar));
|
|
|
3613 gui.toolbar_h = dockitem;
|
|
|
3614
|
|
|
3615 gnome_dock_add_item(GNOME_DOCK(GNOME_APP(gui.mainwin)->dock),
|
|
|
3616 GNOME_DOCK_ITEM(dockitem),
|
|
|
3617 GNOME_DOCK_TOP, /* placement */
|
|
|
3618 1, /* band_num */
|
|
|
3619 1, /* band_position */
|
|
|
3620 0, /* offset */
|
|
|
3621 TRUE);
|
|
|
3622 gtk_container_border_width(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.toolbar), 2);
|
|
|
3623 gtk_widget_show(gui.toolbar);
|
|
|
3624 # endif
|
|
|
3625 }
|
|
|
3626 else
|
|
|
3627 # endif /* FEAT_GUI_GNOME */
|
|
|
3628 {
|
|
|
3629 # ifndef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3630 gtk_container_border_width(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.toolbar), 1);
|
|
|
3631 # endif
|
|
|
3632 if (vim_strchr(p_go, GO_TOOLBAR) != NULL
|
|
|
3633 && (toolbar_flags & (TOOLBAR_TEXT | TOOLBAR_ICONS)))
|
|
|
3634 gtk_widget_show(gui.toolbar);
|
|
|
3635 gtk_box_pack_start(GTK_BOX(vbox), gui.toolbar, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
|
|
|
3636 }
|
|
|
3637 #endif /* FEAT_TOOLBAR */
|
|
|
3638
|
|
685
|
3639 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_TABLINE
|
|
782
|
3640 /*
|
|
|
3641 * Use a Notebook for the tab pages labels. The labels are hidden by
|
|
|
3642 * default.
|
|
|
3643 */
|
|
791
|
3644 gui.tabline = gtk_notebook_new();
|
|
|
3645 gtk_widget_show(gui.tabline);
|
|
|
3646 gtk_box_pack_start(GTK_BOX(vbox), gui.tabline, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
|
|
|
3647 gtk_notebook_set_show_border(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), FALSE);
|
|
|
3648 gtk_notebook_set_show_tabs(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), FALSE);
|
|
|
3649
|
|
|
3650 {
|
|
|
3651 GtkWidget *page, *label;
|
|
|
3652
|
|
|
3653 /* Add the first tab. */
|
|
|
3654 page = gtk_vbox_new(FALSE, 0);
|
|
|
3655 gtk_widget_show(page);
|
|
|
3656 gtk_container_add(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.tabline), page);
|
|
|
3657 label = gtk_label_new("-Empty-");
|
|
|
3658 gtk_widget_show(label);
|
|
|
3659 gtk_notebook_set_tab_label(GTK_NOTEBOOK(gui.tabline), page, label);
|
|
|
3660 }
|
|
|
3661 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.tabline), "switch_page",
|
|
|
3662 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(on_select_tab), NULL);
|
|
|
3663
|
|
|
3664 /* Create a popup menu for the tab line and connect it. */
|
|
|
3665 tabline_menu = create_tabline_menu();
|
|
|
3666 gtk_signal_connect_object(GTK_OBJECT(gui.tabline), "button_press_event",
|
|
|
3667 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(on_tabline_menu), GTK_OBJECT(tabline_menu));
|
|
685
|
3668 #endif
|
|
|
3669
|
|
7
|
3670 gui.formwin = gtk_form_new();
|
|
|
3671 gtk_container_border_width(GTK_CONTAINER(gui.formwin), 0);
|
|
|
3672 gtk_widget_set_events(gui.formwin, GDK_EXPOSURE_MASK);
|
|
|
3673
|
|
|
3674 gui.drawarea = gtk_drawing_area_new();
|
|
|
3675
|
|
|
3676 /* Determine which events we will filter. */
|
|
|
3677 gtk_widget_set_events(gui.drawarea,
|
|
|
3678 GDK_EXPOSURE_MASK |
|
|
|
3679 GDK_ENTER_NOTIFY_MASK |
|
|
|
3680 GDK_LEAVE_NOTIFY_MASK |
|
|
|
3681 GDK_BUTTON_PRESS_MASK |
|
|
|
3682 GDK_BUTTON_RELEASE_MASK |
|
|
|
3683 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3684 GDK_SCROLL_MASK |
|
|
|
3685 #endif
|
|
|
3686 GDK_KEY_PRESS_MASK |
|
|
|
3687 GDK_KEY_RELEASE_MASK |
|
|
|
3688 GDK_POINTER_MOTION_MASK |
|
|
|
3689 GDK_POINTER_MOTION_HINT_MASK);
|
|
|
3690
|
|
|
3691 gtk_widget_show(gui.drawarea);
|
|
|
3692 gtk_form_put(GTK_FORM(gui.formwin), gui.drawarea, 0, 0);
|
|
|
3693 gtk_widget_show(gui.formwin);
|
|
|
3694 gtk_box_pack_start(GTK_BOX(vbox), gui.formwin, TRUE, TRUE, 0);
|
|
|
3695
|
|
|
3696 /* For GtkSockets, key-presses must go to the focus widget (drawarea)
|
|
|
3697 * and not the window. */
|
|
|
3698 gtk_signal_connect((gtk_socket_id == 0) ? GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin)
|
|
|
3699 : GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea),
|
|
|
3700 "key_press_event",
|
|
|
3701 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(key_press_event), NULL);
|
|
|
3702 #if defined(FEAT_XIM) && defined(HAVE_GTK2)
|
|
|
3703 /* Also forward key release events for the benefit of GTK+ 2 input
|
|
|
3704 * modules. Try CTRL-SHIFT-xdigits to enter a Unicode code point. */
|
|
|
3705 g_signal_connect((gtk_socket_id == 0) ? G_OBJECT(gui.mainwin)
|
|
|
3706 : G_OBJECT(gui.drawarea),
|
|
|
3707 "key_release_event",
|
|
|
3708 G_CALLBACK(&key_release_event), NULL);
|
|
|
3709 #endif
|
|
|
3710 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "realize",
|
|
|
3711 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(drawarea_realize_cb), NULL);
|
|
|
3712 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "unrealize",
|
|
|
3713 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(drawarea_unrealize_cb), NULL);
|
|
|
3714
|
|
|
3715 gtk_signal_connect_after(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "style_set",
|
|
|
3716 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(&drawarea_style_set_cb), NULL);
|
|
|
3717
|
|
|
3718 gui.visibility = GDK_VISIBILITY_UNOBSCURED;
|
|
|
3719
|
|
|
3720 #if !(defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION))
|
|
|
3721 wm_protocols_atom = gdk_atom_intern("WM_PROTOCOLS", FALSE);
|
|
|
3722 save_yourself_atom = gdk_atom_intern("WM_SAVE_YOURSELF", FALSE);
|
|
|
3723 #endif
|
|
|
3724
|
|
|
3725 if (gtk_socket_id != 0)
|
|
|
3726 /* make sure keybord input can go to the drawarea */
|
|
|
3727 GTK_WIDGET_SET_FLAGS(gui.drawarea, GTK_CAN_FOCUS);
|
|
|
3728
|
|
|
3729 /*
|
|
|
3730 * Set clipboard specific atoms
|
|
|
3731 */
|
|
|
3732 vim_atom = gdk_atom_intern(VIM_ATOM_NAME, FALSE);
|
|
|
3733 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
3734 vimenc_atom = gdk_atom_intern(VIMENC_ATOM_NAME, FALSE);
|
|
|
3735 #endif
|
|
|
3736 clip_star.gtk_sel_atom = GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY;
|
|
|
3737 clip_plus.gtk_sel_atom = gdk_atom_intern("CLIPBOARD", FALSE);
|
|
|
3738
|
|
|
3739 /*
|
|
|
3740 * Start out by adding the configured border width into the border offset.
|
|
|
3741 */
|
|
|
3742 gui.border_offset = gui.border_width;
|
|
|
3743
|
|
|
3744 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "visibility_notify_event",
|
|
|
3745 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(visibility_event), NULL);
|
|
|
3746 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "expose_event",
|
|
|
3747 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(expose_event), NULL);
|
|
|
3748
|
|
|
3749 /*
|
|
|
3750 * Only install these enter/leave callbacks when 'p' in 'guioptions'.
|
|
|
3751 * Only needed for some window managers.
|
|
|
3752 */
|
|
|
3753 if (vim_strchr(p_go, GO_POINTER) != NULL)
|
|
|
3754 {
|
|
|
3755 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "leave_notify_event",
|
|
|
3756 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(leave_notify_event), NULL);
|
|
|
3757 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "enter_notify_event",
|
|
|
3758 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(enter_notify_event), NULL);
|
|
|
3759 }
|
|
|
3760
|
|
791
|
3761 /* Real windows can get focus ... GtkPlug, being a mere container can't,
|
|
|
3762 * only its widgets. Arguably, this could be common code and we not use
|
|
|
3763 * the window focus at all, but let's be safe.
|
|
|
3764 */
|
|
|
3765 if (gtk_socket_id == 0)
|
|
|
3766 {
|
|
|
3767 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "focus_out_event",
|
|
|
3768 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(focus_out_event), NULL);
|
|
|
3769 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "focus_in_event",
|
|
|
3770 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(focus_in_event), NULL);
|
|
|
3771 }
|
|
|
3772 else
|
|
|
3773 {
|
|
|
3774 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "focus_out_event",
|
|
|
3775 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(focus_out_event), NULL);
|
|
|
3776 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "focus_in_event",
|
|
|
3777 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(focus_in_event), NULL);
|
|
|
3778 #ifdef FEAT_GUI_TABLINE
|
|
|
3779 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.tabline), "focus_out_event",
|
|
|
3780 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(focus_out_event), NULL);
|
|
|
3781 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.tabline), "focus_in_event",
|
|
|
3782 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(focus_in_event), NULL);
|
|
|
3783 #endif /* FEAT_GUI_TABLINE */
|
|
|
3784 }
|
|
7
|
3785
|
|
|
3786 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "motion_notify_event",
|
|
|
3787 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(motion_notify_event), NULL);
|
|
|
3788 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "button_press_event",
|
|
|
3789 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(button_press_event), NULL);
|
|
|
3790 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "button_release_event",
|
|
|
3791 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(button_release_event), NULL);
|
|
|
3792 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3793 g_signal_connect(G_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "scroll_event",
|
|
|
3794 G_CALLBACK(&scroll_event), NULL);
|
|
|
3795 #endif
|
|
|
3796
|
|
|
3797 /*
|
|
|
3798 * Add selection handler functions.
|
|
|
3799 */
|
|
|
3800 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "selection_clear_event",
|
|
|
3801 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(selection_clear_event), NULL);
|
|
|
3802 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "selection_received",
|
|
|
3803 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(selection_received_cb), NULL);
|
|
|
3804
|
|
|
3805 /*
|
|
|
3806 * Add selection targets for PRIMARY and CLIPBOARD selections.
|
|
|
3807 */
|
|
|
3808 gtk_selection_add_targets(gui.drawarea,
|
|
|
3809 (GdkAtom)GDK_SELECTION_PRIMARY,
|
|
|
3810 selection_targets, N_SELECTION_TARGETS);
|
|
|
3811 gtk_selection_add_targets(gui.drawarea,
|
|
|
3812 (GdkAtom)clip_plus.gtk_sel_atom,
|
|
|
3813 selection_targets, N_SELECTION_TARGETS);
|
|
|
3814
|
|
|
3815 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "selection_get",
|
|
|
3816 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(selection_get_cb), NULL);
|
|
|
3817
|
|
|
3818 /* Pretend we don't have input focus, we will get an event if we do. */
|
|
|
3819 gui.in_focus = FALSE;
|
|
|
3820
|
|
|
3821 return OK;
|
|
|
3822 }
|
|
|
3823
|
|
|
3824 #if (defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(FEAT_SESSION)) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
3825 /*
|
|
|
3826 * This is called from gui_start() after a fork() has been done.
|
|
|
3827 * We have to tell the session manager our new PID.
|
|
|
3828 */
|
|
|
3829 void
|
|
|
3830 gui_mch_forked(void)
|
|
|
3831 {
|
|
|
3832 if (using_gnome)
|
|
|
3833 {
|
|
|
3834 GnomeClient *client;
|
|
|
3835
|
|
|
3836 client = gnome_master_client();
|
|
|
3837
|
|
|
3838 if (client != NULL)
|
|
|
3839 gnome_client_set_process_id(client, getpid());
|
|
|
3840 }
|
|
|
3841 }
|
|
|
3842 #endif /* FEAT_GUI_GNOME && FEAT_SESSION */
|
|
|
3843
|
|
|
3844 /*
|
|
|
3845 * Called when the foreground or background color has been changed.
|
|
|
3846 * This used to change the graphics contexts directly but we are
|
|
|
3847 * currently manipulating them where desired.
|
|
|
3848 */
|
|
|
3849 void
|
|
|
3850 gui_mch_new_colors(void)
|
|
|
3851 {
|
|
|
3852 if (gui.drawarea != NULL && gui.drawarea->window != NULL)
|
|
|
3853 {
|
|
|
3854 GdkColor color = { 0, 0, 0, 0 };
|
|
|
3855
|
|
|
3856 color.pixel = gui.back_pixel;
|
|
|
3857 gdk_window_set_background(gui.drawarea->window, &color);
|
|
|
3858 }
|
|
|
3859 }
|
|
|
3860
|
|
|
3861 /*
|
|
|
3862 * This signal informs us about the need to rearrange our sub-widgets.
|
|
|
3863 */
|
|
|
3864 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
3865 static gint
|
|
|
3866 form_configure_event(GtkWidget *widget, GdkEventConfigure *event,
|
|
|
3867 gpointer data)
|
|
|
3868 {
|
|
791
|
3869 int usable_height = event->height;
|
|
|
3870
|
|
|
3871 /* When in a GtkPlug, we can't guarantee valid heights (as a round
|
|
|
3872 * no. of char-heights), so we have to manually sanitise them.
|
|
|
3873 * Widths seem to sort themselves out, don't ask me why.
|
|
|
3874 */
|
|
|
3875 if (gtk_socket_id != 0)
|
|
|
3876 usable_height -= (gui.char_height - (gui.char_height/2)); /* sic. */
|
|
|
3877
|
|
7
|
3878 gtk_form_freeze(GTK_FORM(gui.formwin));
|
|
791
|
3879 gui_resize_shell(event->width, usable_height);
|
|
7
|
3880 gtk_form_thaw(GTK_FORM(gui.formwin));
|
|
|
3881
|
|
|
3882 return TRUE;
|
|
|
3883 }
|
|
|
3884
|
|
|
3885 /*
|
|
|
3886 * Function called when window already closed.
|
|
|
3887 * We can't do much more here than to trying to preserve what had been done,
|
|
|
3888 * since the window is already inevitably going away.
|
|
|
3889 */
|
|
|
3890 /*ARGSUSED0*/
|
|
|
3891 static void
|
|
|
3892 mainwin_destroy_cb(GtkObject *object, gpointer data)
|
|
|
3893 {
|
|
|
3894 /* Don't write messages to the GUI anymore */
|
|
|
3895 full_screen = FALSE;
|
|
|
3896
|
|
|
3897 gui.mainwin = NULL;
|
|
|
3898 gui.drawarea = NULL;
|
|
|
3899
|
|
|
3900 if (!exiting) /* only do anything if the destroy was unexpected */
|
|
|
3901 {
|
|
419
|
3902 vim_strncpy(IObuff,
|
|
|
3903 (char_u *)_("Vim: Main window unexpectedly destroyed\n"),
|
|
|
3904 IOSIZE - 1);
|
|
7
|
3905 preserve_exit();
|
|
|
3906 }
|
|
|
3907 }
|
|
|
3908
|
|
791
|
3909
|
|
|
3910 /*
|
|
|
3911 * Bit of a hack to ensure we start GtkPlug windows with the correct window
|
|
|
3912 * hints (and thus the required size from -geom), but that after that we
|
|
|
3913 * put the hints back to normal (the actual minimum size) so we may
|
|
|
3914 * subsequently be resized smaller. GtkSocket (the parent end) uses the
|
|
|
3915 * plug's window 'min hints to set *it's* minum size, but that's also the
|
|
|
3916 * only way we have of making ourselves bigger (by set lines/columns).
|
|
|
3917 * Thus set hints at start-up to ensure correct init. size, then a
|
|
|
3918 * second after the final attempt to reset the real minimum hinst (done by
|
|
|
3919 * scrollbar init.), actually do the sttandard hinst and stop the timer.
|
|
|
3920 * We'll not let the default hints be set while this timer's active.
|
|
|
3921 */
|
|
|
3922 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
3923 static gboolean
|
|
|
3924 check_startup_plug_hints(gpointer data)
|
|
|
3925 {
|
|
|
3926 if (init_window_hints_state == 1)
|
|
|
3927 {
|
|
|
3928 /* Safe to use normal hints now */
|
|
|
3929 init_window_hints_state = 0;
|
|
|
3930 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0);
|
|
|
3931 return FALSE; /* stop timer */
|
|
|
3932 }
|
|
|
3933
|
|
|
3934 /* Keep on trying */
|
|
|
3935 init_window_hints_state = 1;
|
|
|
3936 return TRUE;
|
|
|
3937 }
|
|
|
3938
|
|
|
3939
|
|
7
|
3940 /*
|
|
|
3941 * Open the GUI window which was created by a call to gui_mch_init().
|
|
|
3942 */
|
|
|
3943 int
|
|
|
3944 gui_mch_open(void)
|
|
|
3945 {
|
|
|
3946 guicolor_T fg_pixel = INVALCOLOR;
|
|
|
3947 guicolor_T bg_pixel = INVALCOLOR;
|
|
|
3948
|
|
|
3949 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3950 /*
|
|
|
3951 * Allow setting a window role on the command line, or invent one
|
|
|
3952 * if none was specified. This is mainly useful for GNOME session
|
|
|
3953 * support; allowing the WM to restore window placement.
|
|
|
3954 */
|
|
|
3955 if (role_argument != NULL)
|
|
|
3956 {
|
|
|
3957 gtk_window_set_role(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), role_argument);
|
|
|
3958 }
|
|
|
3959 else
|
|
|
3960 {
|
|
|
3961 char *role;
|
|
|
3962
|
|
|
3963 /* Invent a unique-enough ID string for the role */
|
|
|
3964 role = g_strdup_printf("vim-%u-%u-%u",
|
|
|
3965 (unsigned)mch_get_pid(),
|
|
|
3966 (unsigned)g_random_int(),
|
|
|
3967 (unsigned)time(NULL));
|
|
|
3968
|
|
|
3969 gtk_window_set_role(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), role);
|
|
|
3970 g_free(role);
|
|
|
3971 }
|
|
|
3972 #endif
|
|
|
3973
|
|
|
3974 if (gui_win_x != -1 && gui_win_y != -1)
|
|
|
3975 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3976 gtk_window_move(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), gui_win_x, gui_win_y);
|
|
|
3977 #else
|
|
|
3978 gtk_widget_set_uposition(gui.mainwin, gui_win_x, gui_win_y);
|
|
|
3979 #endif
|
|
|
3980
|
|
|
3981 /* Determine user specified geometry, if present. */
|
|
|
3982 if (gui.geom != NULL)
|
|
|
3983 {
|
|
|
3984 int mask;
|
|
|
3985 unsigned int w, h;
|
|
|
3986 int x = 0;
|
|
|
3987 int y = 0;
|
|
|
3988
|
|
|
3989 mask = XParseGeometry((char *)gui.geom, &x, &y, &w, &h);
|
|
|
3990
|
|
|
3991 if (mask & WidthValue)
|
|
|
3992 Columns = w;
|
|
|
3993 if (mask & HeightValue)
|
|
|
3994 Rows = h;
|
|
|
3995 if (mask & (XValue | YValue))
|
|
|
3996 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
3997 gtk_window_move(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), x, y);
|
|
|
3998 #else
|
|
|
3999 gtk_widget_set_uposition(gui.mainwin, x, y);
|
|
|
4000 #endif
|
|
|
4001 vim_free(gui.geom);
|
|
|
4002 gui.geom = NULL;
|
|
791
|
4003
|
|
|
4004 /* From now until everyone's stopped trying to set the window hints
|
|
|
4005 * to their correct minimum values, stop them being set as we need
|
|
|
4006 * them to remain at our required size for the parent GtkSocket to
|
|
|
4007 * give us the right initial size.
|
|
|
4008 */
|
|
|
4009 if (gtk_socket_id != 0 && (mask & WidthValue || mask & HeightValue))
|
|
|
4010 {
|
|
|
4011 guint pixel_width = (guint)(gui_get_base_width() + Columns * gui.char_width);
|
|
|
4012 guint pixel_height = (guint)(gui_get_base_height() + Rows * gui.char_height);
|
|
|
4013
|
|
|
4014 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
4015 pixel_width += get_menu_tool_width();
|
|
|
4016 pixel_height += get_menu_tool_height();
|
|
|
4017 #endif
|
|
|
4018
|
|
|
4019 update_window_manager_hints(pixel_width, pixel_height);
|
|
|
4020 init_window_hints_state = 1;
|
|
|
4021 g_timeout_add(1000, check_startup_plug_hints, NULL);
|
|
|
4022 }
|
|
7
|
4023 }
|
|
|
4024
|
|
|
4025 gtk_form_set_size(GTK_FORM(gui.formwin),
|
|
|
4026 (guint)(gui_get_base_width() + Columns * gui.char_width),
|
|
|
4027 (guint)(gui_get_base_height() + Rows * gui.char_height));
|
|
791
|
4028 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0);
|
|
7
|
4029
|
|
|
4030 if (foreground_argument != NULL)
|
|
|
4031 fg_pixel = gui_get_color((char_u *)foreground_argument);
|
|
|
4032 if (fg_pixel == INVALCOLOR)
|
|
|
4033 fg_pixel = gui_get_color((char_u *)"Black");
|
|
|
4034
|
|
|
4035 if (background_argument != NULL)
|
|
|
4036 bg_pixel = gui_get_color((char_u *)background_argument);
|
|
|
4037 if (bg_pixel == INVALCOLOR)
|
|
|
4038 bg_pixel = gui_get_color((char_u *)"White");
|
|
|
4039
|
|
|
4040 if (found_reverse_arg)
|
|
|
4041 {
|
|
|
4042 gui.def_norm_pixel = bg_pixel;
|
|
|
4043 gui.def_back_pixel = fg_pixel;
|
|
|
4044 }
|
|
|
4045 else
|
|
|
4046 {
|
|
|
4047 gui.def_norm_pixel = fg_pixel;
|
|
|
4048 gui.def_back_pixel = bg_pixel;
|
|
|
4049 }
|
|
|
4050
|
|
|
4051 /* Get the colors from the "Normal" and "Menu" group (set in syntax.c or
|
|
|
4052 * in a vimrc file) */
|
|
|
4053 set_normal_colors();
|
|
|
4054
|
|
|
4055 /* Check that none of the colors are the same as the background color */
|
|
|
4056 gui_check_colors();
|
|
|
4057
|
|
|
4058 /* Get the colors for the highlight groups (gui_check_colors() might have
|
|
|
4059 * changed them). */
|
|
|
4060 highlight_gui_started(); /* re-init colors and fonts */
|
|
|
4061
|
|
|
4062 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.mainwin), "destroy",
|
|
|
4063 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(mainwin_destroy_cb), NULL);
|
|
|
4064
|
|
|
4065 #ifdef FEAT_HANGULIN
|
|
|
4066 hangul_keyboard_set();
|
|
|
4067 #endif
|
|
|
4068
|
|
|
4069 /*
|
|
|
4070 * Notify the fixed area about the need to resize the contents of the
|
|
|
4071 * gui.formwin, which we use for random positioning of the included
|
|
|
4072 * components.
|
|
|
4073 *
|
|
|
4074 * We connect this signal deferred finally after anything is in place,
|
|
|
4075 * since this is intended to handle resizements coming from the window
|
|
|
4076 * manager upon us and should not interfere with what VIM is requesting
|
|
|
4077 * upon startup.
|
|
|
4078 */
|
|
|
4079 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.formwin), "configure_event",
|
|
|
4080 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(form_configure_event), NULL);
|
|
|
4081
|
|
|
4082 #ifdef FEAT_DND
|
|
|
4083 /*
|
|
|
4084 * Set up for receiving DND items.
|
|
|
4085 */
|
|
|
4086 gtk_drag_dest_set(gui.drawarea,
|
|
|
4087 GTK_DEST_DEFAULT_ALL,
|
|
|
4088 dnd_targets, N_DND_TARGETS,
|
|
|
4089 GDK_ACTION_COPY);
|
|
|
4090
|
|
|
4091 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.drawarea), "drag_data_received",
|
|
|
4092 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(drag_data_received_cb), NULL);
|
|
|
4093 #endif
|
|
|
4094
|
|
|
4095 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
4096 /* With GTK+ 2, we need to iconify the window before calling show()
|
|
|
4097 * to avoid mapping the window for a short time. This is just as one
|
|
|
4098 * would expect it to work, but it's different in GTK+ 1. The funny
|
|
|
4099 * thing is that iconifying after show() _does_ work with GTK+ 1.
|
|
|
4100 * (BTW doing this in the "realize" handler makes no difference.) */
|
|
|
4101 if (found_iconic_arg && gtk_socket_id == 0)
|
|
|
4102 gui_mch_iconify();
|
|
|
4103 #endif
|
|
|
4104
|
|
|
4105 {
|
|
|
4106 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(HAVE_GTK2) && defined(FEAT_MENU)
|
|
|
4107 unsigned long menu_handler = 0;
|
|
|
4108 # ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR
|
|
|
4109 unsigned long tool_handler = 0;
|
|
|
4110 # endif
|
|
|
4111 /*
|
|
|
4112 * Urgh hackish :/ For some reason BonoboDockLayout always forces a
|
|
|
4113 * show when restoring the saved layout configuration. We can't just
|
|
|
4114 * hide the widgets again after gtk_widget_show(gui.mainwin) since it's
|
|
|
4115 * a toplevel window and thus will be realized immediately. Instead,
|
|
|
4116 * connect signal handlers to hide the widgets just after they've been
|
|
|
4117 * marked visible, but before the main window is realized.
|
|
|
4118 */
|
|
|
4119 if (using_gnome && vim_strchr(p_go, GO_MENUS) == NULL)
|
|
|
4120 menu_handler = g_signal_connect_after(gui.menubar_h, "show",
|
|
|
4121 G_CALLBACK(>k_widget_hide),
|
|
|
4122 NULL);
|
|
|
4123 # ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR
|
|
|
4124 if (using_gnome && vim_strchr(p_go, GO_TOOLBAR) == NULL
|
|
|
4125 && (toolbar_flags & (TOOLBAR_TEXT | TOOLBAR_ICONS)))
|
|
|
4126 tool_handler = g_signal_connect_after(gui.toolbar_h, "show",
|
|
|
4127 G_CALLBACK(>k_widget_hide),
|
|
|
4128 NULL);
|
|
|
4129 # endif
|
|
|
4130 #endif
|
|
|
4131 gtk_widget_show(gui.mainwin);
|
|
|
4132
|
|
|
4133 #if defined(FEAT_GUI_GNOME) && defined(HAVE_GTK2) && defined(FEAT_MENU)
|
|
|
4134 if (menu_handler != 0)
|
|
|
4135 g_signal_handler_disconnect(gui.menubar_h, menu_handler);
|
|
|
4136 # ifdef FEAT_TOOLBAR
|
|
|
4137 if (tool_handler != 0)
|
|
|
4138 g_signal_handler_disconnect(gui.toolbar_h, tool_handler);
|
|
|
4139 # endif
|
|
|
4140 #endif
|
|
|
4141 }
|
|
|
4142
|
|
|
4143 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
4144 /* With GTK+ 1, we need to iconify the window after calling show().
|
|
|
4145 * See the comment above for details. */
|
|
|
4146 if (found_iconic_arg && gtk_socket_id == 0)
|
|
|
4147 gui_mch_iconify();
|
|
|
4148 #endif
|
|
|
4149
|
|
|
4150 return OK;
|
|
|
4151 }
|
|
|
4152
|
|
|
4153
|
|
|
4154 /*ARGSUSED0*/
|
|
|
4155 void
|
|
|
4156 gui_mch_exit(int rc)
|
|
|
4157 {
|
|
|
4158 if (gui.mainwin != NULL)
|
|
|
4159 gtk_widget_destroy(gui.mainwin);
|
|
|
4160
|
|
|
4161 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
4162 gtk_main_quit();
|
|
|
4163 }
|
|
|
4164
|
|
|
4165 /*
|
|
|
4166 * Get the position of the top left corner of the window.
|
|
|
4167 */
|
|
|
4168 int
|
|
|
4169 gui_mch_get_winpos(int *x, int *y)
|
|
|
4170 {
|
|
|
4171 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
4172 gtk_window_get_position(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), x, y);
|
|
|
4173 #else
|
|
|
4174 /* For some people this must be gdk_window_get_origin() for a correct
|
|
|
4175 * result. Where is the documentation! */
|
|
|
4176 gdk_window_get_root_origin(gui.mainwin->window, x, y);
|
|
|
4177 #endif
|
|
|
4178 return OK;
|
|
|
4179 }
|
|
|
4180
|
|
|
4181 /*
|
|
|
4182 * Set the position of the top left corner of the window to the given
|
|
|
4183 * coordinates.
|
|
|
4184 */
|
|
|
4185 void
|
|
|
4186 gui_mch_set_winpos(int x, int y)
|
|
|
4187 {
|
|
|
4188 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
4189 gtk_window_move(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), x, y);
|
|
|
4190 #else
|
|
|
4191 gdk_window_move(gui.mainwin->window, x, y);
|
|
|
4192 #endif
|
|
|
4193 }
|
|
|
4194
|
|
|
4195 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
4196 #if 0
|
|
|
4197 static int resize_idle_installed = FALSE;
|
|
|
4198 /*
|
|
|
4199 * Idle handler to force resize. Used by gui_mch_set_shellsize() to ensure
|
|
|
4200 * the shell size doesn't exceed the window size, i.e. if the window manager
|
|
|
4201 * ignored our size request. Usually this happens if the window is maximized.
|
|
|
4202 *
|
|
|
4203 * FIXME: It'd be nice if we could find a little more orthodox solution.
|
|
|
4204 * See also the remark below in gui_mch_set_shellsize().
|
|
|
4205 *
|
|
|
4206 * DISABLED: When doing ":set lines+=1" this function would first invoke
|
|
|
4207 * gui_resize_shell() with the old size, then the normal callback would
|
|
|
4208 * report the new size through form_configure_event(). That caused the window
|
|
|
4209 * layout to be messed up.
|
|
|
4210 */
|
|
|
4211 /*ARGSUSED0*/
|
|
|
4212 static gboolean
|
|
|
4213 force_shell_resize_idle(gpointer data)
|
|
|
4214 {
|
|
|
4215 if (gui.mainwin != NULL
|
|
|
4216 && GTK_WIDGET_REALIZED(gui.mainwin)
|
|
|
4217 && GTK_WIDGET_VISIBLE(gui.mainwin))
|
|
|
4218 {
|
|
|
4219 int width;
|
|
|
4220 int height;
|
|
|
4221
|
|
|
4222 gtk_window_get_size(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), &width, &height);
|
|
|
4223
|
|
|
4224 width -= get_menu_tool_width();
|
|
|
4225 height -= get_menu_tool_height();
|
|
|
4226
|
|
|
4227 gui_resize_shell(width, height);
|
|
|
4228 }
|
|
|
4229
|
|
|
4230 resize_idle_installed = FALSE;
|
|
|
4231 return FALSE; /* don't call me again */
|
|
|
4232 }
|
|
|
4233 #endif
|
|
|
4234 #endif /* HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
4235
|
|
|
4236 /*
|
|
|
4237 * Set the windows size.
|
|
|
4238 */
|
|
|
4239 /*ARGSUSED2*/
|
|
|
4240 void
|
|
|
4241 gui_mch_set_shellsize(int width, int height,
|
|
|
4242 int min_width, int min_height,
|
|
|
4243 int base_width, int base_height)
|
|
|
4244 {
|
|
|
4245 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
4246 /* Hack: When the form already is at the desired size, the window might
|
|
|
4247 * have been resized with the mouse. Force a resize by setting a
|
|
|
4248 * different size first. */
|
|
|
4249 if (GTK_FORM(gui.formwin)->width == width
|
|
|
4250 && GTK_FORM(gui.formwin)->height == height)
|
|
|
4251 {
|
|
|
4252 gtk_form_set_size(GTK_FORM(gui.formwin), width + 1, height + 1);
|
|
|
4253 gui_mch_update();
|
|
|
4254 }
|
|
|
4255 gtk_form_set_size(GTK_FORM(gui.formwin), width, height);
|
|
|
4256 #endif
|
|
|
4257
|
|
|
4258 /* give GTK+ a chance to put all widget's into place */
|
|
|
4259 gui_mch_update();
|
|
|
4260
|
|
791
|
4261 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
7
|
4262 /* this will cause the proper resizement to happen too */
|
|
791
|
4263 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0);
|
|
|
4264
|
|
|
4265 #else /* HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
4266 /* this will cause the proper resizement to happen too */
|
|
|
4267 if (gtk_socket_id == 0)
|
|
|
4268 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0);
|
|
|
4269
|
|
7
|
4270 /* With GTK+ 2, changing the size of the form widget doesn't resize
|
|
791
|
4271 * the window. So let's do it the other way around and resize the
|
|
7
|
4272 * main window instead. */
|
|
|
4273 width += get_menu_tool_width();
|
|
|
4274 height += get_menu_tool_height();
|
|
|
4275
|
|
791
|
4276 if (gtk_socket_id == 0)
|
|
|
4277 gtk_window_resize(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), width, height);
|
|
|
4278 else
|
|
|
4279 update_window_manager_hints(width, height);
|
|
7
|
4280
|
|
|
4281 #if 0
|
|
|
4282 if (!resize_idle_installed)
|
|
|
4283 {
|
|
|
4284 g_idle_add_full(GDK_PRIORITY_EVENTS + 10,
|
|
|
4285 &force_shell_resize_idle, NULL, NULL);
|
|
|
4286 resize_idle_installed = TRUE;
|
|
|
4287 }
|
|
|
4288 #endif
|
|
|
4289 /*
|
|
|
4290 * Wait until all events are processed to prevent a crash because the
|
|
|
4291 * real size of the drawing area doesn't reflect Vim's internal ideas.
|
|
|
4292 *
|
|
|
4293 * This is a bit of a hack, since Vim is a terminal application with a GUI
|
|
|
4294 * on top, while the GUI expects to be the boss.
|
|
|
4295 */
|
|
|
4296 gui_mch_update();
|
|
|
4297 #endif
|
|
|
4298 }
|
|
|
4299
|
|
|
4300
|
|
|
4301 /*
|
|
|
4302 * The screen size is used to make sure the initial window doesn't get bigger
|
|
|
4303 * than the screen. This subtracts some room for menubar, toolbar and window
|
|
|
4304 * decorations.
|
|
|
4305 */
|
|
|
4306 void
|
|
|
4307 gui_mch_get_screen_dimensions(int *screen_w, int *screen_h)
|
|
|
4308 {
|
|
|
4309 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD
|
|
|
4310 GdkScreen* screen;
|
|
|
4311
|
|
|
4312 if (gui.mainwin != NULL && gtk_widget_has_screen(gui.mainwin))
|
|
|
4313 screen = gtk_widget_get_screen(gui.mainwin);
|
|
|
4314 else
|
|
|
4315 screen = gdk_screen_get_default();
|
|
|
4316
|
|
|
4317 *screen_w = gdk_screen_get_width(screen);
|
|
|
4318 *screen_h = gdk_screen_get_height(screen) - p_ghr;
|
|
|
4319 #else
|
|
|
4320 *screen_w = gdk_screen_width();
|
|
|
4321 /* Subtract 'guiheadroom' from the height to allow some room for the
|
|
|
4322 * window manager (task list and window title bar). */
|
|
|
4323 *screen_h = gdk_screen_height() - p_ghr;
|
|
|
4324 #endif
|
|
|
4325
|
|
|
4326 /*
|
|
|
4327 * FIXME: dirty trick: Because the gui_get_base_height() doesn't include
|
|
|
4328 * the toolbar and menubar for GTK, we subtract them from the screen
|
|
|
4329 * hight, so that the window size can be made to fit on the screen.
|
|
|
4330 * This should be completely changed later.
|
|
|
4331 */
|
|
|
4332 *screen_w -= get_menu_tool_width();
|
|
|
4333 *screen_h -= get_menu_tool_height();
|
|
|
4334 }
|
|
|
4335
|
|
|
4336 #if defined(FEAT_TITLE) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
4337 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
4338 void
|
|
|
4339 gui_mch_settitle(char_u *title, char_u *icon)
|
|
|
4340 {
|
|
|
4341 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
4342 if (title != NULL && output_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
4343 title = string_convert(&output_conv, title, NULL);
|
|
|
4344 # endif
|
|
|
4345
|
|
|
4346 gtk_window_set_title(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin), (const char *)title);
|
|
|
4347
|
|
|
4348 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
4349 if (output_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
4350 vim_free(title);
|
|
|
4351 # endif
|
|
|
4352 }
|
|
|
4353 #endif /* FEAT_TITLE */
|
|
|
4354
|
|
|
4355 #if defined(FEAT_MENU) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
4356 void
|
|
|
4357 gui_mch_enable_menu(int showit)
|
|
|
4358 {
|
|
|
4359 GtkWidget *widget;
|
|
|
4360
|
|
|
4361 # ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME
|
|
|
4362 if (using_gnome)
|
|
|
4363 widget = gui.menubar_h;
|
|
|
4364 else
|
|
|
4365 # endif
|
|
|
4366 widget = gui.menubar;
|
|
|
4367
|
|
|
4368 if (!showit != !GTK_WIDGET_VISIBLE(widget))
|
|
|
4369 {
|
|
|
4370 if (showit)
|
|
|
4371 gtk_widget_show(widget);
|
|
|
4372 else
|
|
|
4373 gtk_widget_hide(widget);
|
|
|
4374
|
|
791
|
4375 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0);
|
|
7
|
4376 }
|
|
|
4377 }
|
|
|
4378 #endif /* FEAT_MENU */
|
|
|
4379
|
|
|
4380 #if defined(FEAT_TOOLBAR) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
4381 void
|
|
|
4382 gui_mch_show_toolbar(int showit)
|
|
|
4383 {
|
|
|
4384 GtkWidget *widget;
|
|
|
4385
|
|
|
4386 if (gui.toolbar == NULL)
|
|
|
4387 return;
|
|
|
4388
|
|
|
4389 # ifdef FEAT_GUI_GNOME
|
|
|
4390 if (using_gnome)
|
|
|
4391 widget = gui.toolbar_h;
|
|
|
4392 else
|
|
|
4393 # endif
|
|
|
4394 widget = gui.toolbar;
|
|
|
4395
|
|
|
4396 if (showit)
|
|
|
4397 set_toolbar_style(GTK_TOOLBAR(gui.toolbar));
|
|
|
4398
|
|
|
4399 if (!showit != !GTK_WIDGET_VISIBLE(widget))
|
|
|
4400 {
|
|
|
4401 if (showit)
|
|
|
4402 gtk_widget_show(widget);
|
|
|
4403 else
|
|
|
4404 gtk_widget_hide(widget);
|
|
|
4405
|
|
791
|
4406 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0);
|
|
7
|
4407 }
|
|
|
4408 }
|
|
|
4409 #endif /* FEAT_TOOLBAR */
|
|
|
4410
|
|
|
4411 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
4412 /*
|
|
|
4413 * Get a font structure for highlighting.
|
|
|
4414 * "cbdata" is a pointer to the global gui structure.
|
|
|
4415 */
|
|
|
4416 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
4417 static void
|
|
|
4418 font_sel_ok(GtkWidget *wgt, gpointer cbdata)
|
|
|
4419 {
|
|
|
4420 gui_T *vw = (gui_T *)cbdata;
|
|
|
4421 GtkFontSelectionDialog *fs = (GtkFontSelectionDialog *)vw->fontdlg;
|
|
|
4422
|
|
|
4423 if (vw->fontname)
|
|
|
4424 g_free(vw->fontname);
|
|
|
4425
|
|
|
4426 vw->fontname = (char_u *)gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_font_name(fs);
|
|
|
4427 gtk_widget_hide(vw->fontdlg);
|
|
|
4428 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
4429 gtk_main_quit();
|
|
|
4430 }
|
|
|
4431
|
|
|
4432 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
4433 static void
|
|
|
4434 font_sel_cancel(GtkWidget *wgt, gpointer cbdata)
|
|
|
4435 {
|
|
|
4436 gui_T *vw = (gui_T *)cbdata;
|
|
|
4437
|
|
|
4438 gtk_widget_hide(vw->fontdlg);
|
|
|
4439 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
4440 gtk_main_quit();
|
|
|
4441 }
|
|
|
4442
|
|
|
4443 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
4444 static void
|
|
|
4445 font_sel_destroy(GtkWidget *wgt, gpointer cbdata)
|
|
|
4446 {
|
|
|
4447 gui_T *vw = (gui_T *)cbdata;
|
|
|
4448
|
|
|
4449 vw->fontdlg = NULL;
|
|
|
4450 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
4451 gtk_main_quit();
|
|
|
4452 }
|
|
|
4453 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
4454
|
|
|
4455 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
4456 /*
|
|
|
4457 * Check if a given font is a CJK font. This is done in a very crude manner. It
|
|
|
4458 * just see if U+04E00 for zh and ja and U+AC00 for ko are covered in a given
|
|
|
4459 * font. Consequently, this function cannot be used as a general purpose check
|
|
|
4460 * for CJK-ness for which fontconfig APIs should be used. This is only used by
|
|
|
4461 * gui_mch_init_font() to deal with 'CJK fixed width fonts'.
|
|
|
4462 */
|
|
|
4463 static int
|
|
|
4464 is_cjk_font(PangoFontDescription *font_desc)
|
|
|
4465 {
|
|
|
4466 static const char * const cjk_langs[] =
|
|
|
4467 {"zh_CN", "zh_TW", "zh_HK", "ja", "ko"};
|
|
|
4468
|
|
|
4469 PangoFont *font;
|
|
|
4470 unsigned i;
|
|
|
4471 int is_cjk = FALSE;
|
|
|
4472
|
|
|
4473 font = pango_context_load_font(gui.text_context, font_desc);
|
|
|
4474
|
|
|
4475 if (font == NULL)
|
|
|
4476 return FALSE;
|
|
|
4477
|
|
|
4478 for (i = 0; !is_cjk && i < G_N_ELEMENTS(cjk_langs); ++i)
|
|
|
4479 {
|
|
|
4480 PangoCoverage *coverage;
|
|
|
4481 gunichar uc;
|
|
|
4482
|
|
|
4483 coverage = pango_font_get_coverage(
|
|
|
4484 font, pango_language_from_string(cjk_langs[i]));
|
|
|
4485
|
|
|
4486 if (coverage != NULL)
|
|
|
4487 {
|
|
|
4488 uc = (cjk_langs[i][0] == 'k') ? 0xAC00 : 0x4E00;
|
|
|
4489 is_cjk = (pango_coverage_get(coverage, uc) == PANGO_COVERAGE_EXACT);
|
|
|
4490 pango_coverage_unref(coverage);
|
|
|
4491 }
|
|
|
4492 }
|
|
|
4493
|
|
|
4494 g_object_unref(font);
|
|
|
4495
|
|
|
4496 return is_cjk;
|
|
|
4497 }
|
|
|
4498 #endif /* HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
4499
|
|
445
|
4500 /*
|
|
|
4501 * Adjust gui.char_height (after 'linespace' was changed).
|
|
|
4502 */
|
|
7
|
4503 int
|
|
445
|
4504 gui_mch_adjust_charheight(void)
|
|
7
|
4505 {
|
|
|
4506 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
4507 PangoFontMetrics *metrics;
|
|
|
4508 int ascent;
|
|
|
4509 int descent;
|
|
|
4510
|
|
|
4511 metrics = pango_context_get_metrics(gui.text_context, gui.norm_font,
|
|
|
4512 pango_context_get_language(gui.text_context));
|
|
|
4513 ascent = pango_font_metrics_get_ascent(metrics);
|
|
|
4514 descent = pango_font_metrics_get_descent(metrics);
|
|
|
4515
|
|
|
4516 pango_font_metrics_unref(metrics);
|
|
|
4517
|
|
|
4518 gui.char_height = (ascent + descent + PANGO_SCALE - 1) / PANGO_SCALE
|
|
445
|
4519 + p_linespace;
|
|
136
|
4520 /* LINTED: avoid warning: bitwise operation on signed value */
|
|
7
|
4521 gui.char_ascent = PANGO_PIXELS(ascent + p_linespace * PANGO_SCALE / 2);
|
|
|
4522
|
|
|
4523 #else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
4524
|
|
|
4525 gui.char_height = gui.current_font->ascent + gui.current_font->descent
|
|
445
|
4526 + p_linespace;
|
|
7
|
4527 gui.char_ascent = gui.current_font->ascent + p_linespace / 2;
|
|
|
4528
|
|
|
4529 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
4530
|
|
|
4531 /* A not-positive value of char_height may crash Vim. Only happens
|
|
|
4532 * if 'linespace' is negative (which does make sense sometimes). */
|
|
|
4533 gui.char_ascent = MAX(gui.char_ascent, 0);
|
|
|
4534 gui.char_height = MAX(gui.char_height, gui.char_ascent + 1);
|
|
|
4535
|
|
|
4536 return OK;
|
|
|
4537 }
|
|
|
4538
|
|
|
4539 #if defined(FEAT_XFONTSET) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
4540 /*
|
|
|
4541 * Try to load the requested fontset.
|
|
|
4542 */
|
|
|
4543 /*ARGSUSED2*/
|
|
|
4544 GuiFontset
|
|
|
4545 gui_mch_get_fontset(char_u *name, int report_error, int fixed_width)
|
|
|
4546 {
|
|
|
4547 GdkFont *font;
|
|
|
4548
|
|
|
4549 if (!gui.in_use || name == NULL)
|
|
|
4550 return NOFONT;
|
|
|
4551
|
|
|
4552 font = gdk_fontset_load((gchar *)name);
|
|
|
4553
|
|
|
4554 if (font == NULL)
|
|
|
4555 {
|
|
|
4556 if (report_error)
|
|
|
4557 EMSG2(_(e_fontset), name);
|
|
|
4558 return NOFONT;
|
|
|
4559 }
|
|
|
4560 /* TODO: check if the font is fixed width. */
|
|
|
4561
|
|
|
4562 /* reference this font as being in use */
|
|
|
4563 gdk_font_ref(font);
|
|
|
4564
|
|
|
4565 return (GuiFontset)font;
|
|
|
4566 }
|
|
|
4567 #endif /* FEAT_XFONTSET */
|
|
|
4568
|
|
|
4569 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
4570 /*
|
|
|
4571 * Put up a font dialog and return the selected font name in allocated memory.
|
|
|
4572 * "oldval" is the previous value.
|
|
|
4573 * Return NULL when cancelled.
|
|
|
4574 */
|
|
|
4575 char_u *
|
|
|
4576 gui_mch_font_dialog(char_u *oldval)
|
|
|
4577 {
|
|
|
4578 char_u *fontname = NULL;
|
|
|
4579
|
|
|
4580 if (!gui.fontdlg)
|
|
|
4581 {
|
|
|
4582 GtkFontSelectionDialog *fsd = NULL;
|
|
|
4583
|
|
|
4584 gui.fontdlg = gtk_font_selection_dialog_new(_("Font Selection"));
|
|
|
4585 fsd = GTK_FONT_SELECTION_DIALOG(gui.fontdlg);
|
|
|
4586 gtk_window_set_modal(GTK_WINDOW(gui.fontdlg), TRUE);
|
|
|
4587 gtk_window_set_transient_for(GTK_WINDOW(gui.fontdlg),
|
|
|
4588 GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin));
|
|
|
4589 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(gui.fontdlg), "destroy",
|
|
|
4590 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(font_sel_destroy), &gui);
|
|
|
4591 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(fsd->ok_button), "clicked",
|
|
|
4592 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(font_sel_ok), &gui);
|
|
|
4593 gtk_signal_connect(GTK_OBJECT(fsd->cancel_button), "clicked",
|
|
|
4594 GTK_SIGNAL_FUNC(font_sel_cancel), &gui);
|
|
|
4595 }
|
|
|
4596
|
|
|
4597 if (oldval != NULL && *oldval != NUL)
|
|
|
4598 gtk_font_selection_dialog_set_font_name(
|
|
|
4599 GTK_FONT_SELECTION_DIALOG(gui.fontdlg), (char *)oldval);
|
|
|
4600
|
|
|
4601 if (gui.fontname)
|
|
|
4602 {
|
|
|
4603 g_free(gui.fontname);
|
|
|
4604 gui.fontname = NULL;
|
|
|
4605 }
|
|
|
4606 gtk_window_position(GTK_WINDOW(gui.fontdlg), GTK_WIN_POS_MOUSE);
|
|
|
4607 gtk_widget_show(gui.fontdlg);
|
|
|
4608 {
|
|
|
4609 static gchar *spacings[] = {"c", "m", NULL};
|
|
|
4610
|
|
|
4611 /* In GTK 1.2.3 this must be after the gtk_widget_show() call,
|
|
|
4612 * otherwise everything is blocked for ten seconds. */
|
|
|
4613 gtk_font_selection_dialog_set_filter(
|
|
|
4614 GTK_FONT_SELECTION_DIALOG(gui.fontdlg),
|
|
|
4615 GTK_FONT_FILTER_BASE,
|
|
|
4616 GTK_FONT_ALL, NULL, NULL,
|
|
|
4617 NULL, NULL, spacings, NULL);
|
|
|
4618 }
|
|
|
4619
|
|
|
4620 /* Wait for the font dialog to be closed. */
|
|
|
4621 while (gui.fontdlg && GTK_WIDGET_DRAWABLE(gui.fontdlg))
|
|
|
4622 gtk_main_iteration_do(TRUE);
|
|
|
4623
|
|
|
4624 if (gui.fontname != NULL)
|
|
|
4625 {
|
|
714
|
4626 /* Apparently some font names include a comma, need to escape that,
|
|
|
4627 * because in 'guifont' it separates names. */
|
|
|
4628 fontname = vim_strsave_escaped(gui.fontname, (char_u *)",");
|
|
7
|
4629 g_free(gui.fontname);
|
|
|
4630 gui.fontname = NULL;
|
|
|
4631 }
|
|
|
4632 return fontname;
|
|
|
4633 }
|
|
|
4634 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
4635
|
|
|
4636 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
4637 /*
|
|
|
4638 * Put up a font dialog and return the selected font name in allocated memory.
|
|
|
4639 * "oldval" is the previous value. Return NULL when cancelled.
|
|
|
4640 * This should probably go into gui_gtk.c. Hmm.
|
|
|
4641 * FIXME:
|
|
|
4642 * The GTK2 font selection dialog has no filtering API. So we could either
|
|
|
4643 * a) implement our own (possibly copying the code from somewhere else) or
|
|
|
4644 * b) just live with it.
|
|
|
4645 */
|
|
|
4646 char_u *
|
|
|
4647 gui_mch_font_dialog(char_u *oldval)
|
|
|
4648 {
|
|
|
4649 GtkWidget *dialog;
|
|
|
4650 int response;
|
|
|
4651 char_u *fontname = NULL;
|
|
|
4652 char_u *oldname;
|
|
|
4653
|
|
|
4654 dialog = gtk_font_selection_dialog_new(NULL);
|
|
|
4655
|
|
|
4656 gtk_window_set_transient_for(GTK_WINDOW(dialog), GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin));
|
|
|
4657 gtk_window_set_destroy_with_parent(GTK_WINDOW(dialog), TRUE);
|
|
|
4658
|
|
|
4659 if (oldval != NULL && oldval[0] != NUL)
|
|
|
4660 {
|
|
|
4661 if (output_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
4662 oldname = string_convert(&output_conv, oldval, NULL);
|
|
|
4663 else
|
|
|
4664 oldname = oldval;
|
|
|
4665
|
|
|
4666 /* Annoying bug in GTK (or Pango): if the font name does not include a
|
|
|
4667 * size, zero is used. Use default point size ten. */
|
|
|
4668 if (!vim_isdigit(oldname[STRLEN(oldname) - 1]))
|
|
|
4669 {
|
|
|
4670 char_u *p = vim_strnsave(oldname, STRLEN(oldname) + 3);
|
|
|
4671
|
|
|
4672 if (p != NULL)
|
|
|
4673 {
|
|
|
4674 STRCPY(p + STRLEN(p), " 10");
|
|
|
4675 if (oldname != oldval)
|
|
|
4676 vim_free(oldname);
|
|
|
4677 oldname = p;
|
|
|
4678 }
|
|
|
4679 }
|
|
|
4680
|
|
|
4681 gtk_font_selection_dialog_set_font_name(
|
|
|
4682 GTK_FONT_SELECTION_DIALOG(dialog), (const char *)oldname);
|
|
|
4683
|
|
|
4684 if (oldname != oldval)
|
|
100
|
4685 vim_free(oldname);
|
|
7
|
4686 }
|
|
|
4687
|
|
|
4688 response = gtk_dialog_run(GTK_DIALOG(dialog));
|
|
|
4689
|
|
|
4690 if (response == GTK_RESPONSE_OK)
|
|
|
4691 {
|
|
|
4692 char *name;
|
|
|
4693
|
|
|
4694 name = gtk_font_selection_dialog_get_font_name(
|
|
|
4695 GTK_FONT_SELECTION_DIALOG(dialog));
|
|
|
4696 if (name != NULL)
|
|
|
4697 {
|
|
714
|
4698 char_u *p;
|
|
|
4699
|
|
|
4700 /* Apparently some font names include a comma, need to escape
|
|
|
4701 * that, because in 'guifont' it separates names. */
|
|
|
4702 p = vim_strsave_escaped((char_u *)name, (char_u *)",");
|
|
|
4703 g_free(name);
|
|
7
|
4704 if (input_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
714
|
4705 {
|
|
|
4706 fontname = string_convert(&input_conv, p, NULL);
|
|
|
4707 vim_free(p);
|
|
|
4708 }
|
|
7
|
4709 else
|
|
714
|
4710 fontname = p;
|
|
7
|
4711 }
|
|
|
4712 }
|
|
|
4713
|
|
|
4714 if (response != GTK_RESPONSE_NONE)
|
|
|
4715 gtk_widget_destroy(dialog);
|
|
|
4716
|
|
|
4717 return fontname;
|
|
|
4718 }
|
|
|
4719
|
|
|
4720 /*
|
|
|
4721 * Some monospace fonts don't support a bold weight, and fall back
|
|
|
4722 * silently to the regular weight. But this is no good since our text
|
|
|
4723 * drawing function can emulate bold by overstriking. So let's try
|
|
|
4724 * to detect whether bold weight is actually available and emulate it
|
|
|
4725 * otherwise.
|
|
|
4726 *
|
|
|
4727 * Note that we don't need to check for italic style since Xft can
|
|
|
4728 * emulate italic on its own, provided you have a proper fontconfig
|
|
|
4729 * setup. We wouldn't be able to emulate it in Vim anyway.
|
|
|
4730 */
|
|
|
4731 static void
|
|
|
4732 get_styled_font_variants(void)
|
|
|
4733 {
|
|
|
4734 PangoFontDescription *bold_font_desc;
|
|
|
4735 PangoFont *plain_font;
|
|
|
4736 PangoFont *bold_font;
|
|
|
4737
|
|
|
4738 gui.font_can_bold = FALSE;
|
|
|
4739
|
|
|
4740 plain_font = pango_context_load_font(gui.text_context, gui.norm_font);
|
|
|
4741
|
|
|
4742 if (plain_font == NULL)
|
|
|
4743 return;
|
|
|
4744
|
|
|
4745 bold_font_desc = pango_font_description_copy_static(gui.norm_font);
|
|
|
4746 pango_font_description_set_weight(bold_font_desc, PANGO_WEIGHT_BOLD);
|
|
|
4747
|
|
|
4748 bold_font = pango_context_load_font(gui.text_context, bold_font_desc);
|
|
|
4749 /*
|
|
|
4750 * The comparison relies on the unique handle nature of a PangoFont*,
|
|
|
4751 * i.e. it's assumed that a different PangoFont* won't refer to the
|
|
|
4752 * same font. Seems to work, and failing here isn't critical anyway.
|
|
|
4753 */
|
|
|
4754 if (bold_font != NULL)
|
|
|
4755 {
|
|
|
4756 gui.font_can_bold = (bold_font != plain_font);
|
|
|
4757 g_object_unref(bold_font);
|
|
|
4758 }
|
|
|
4759
|
|
|
4760 pango_font_description_free(bold_font_desc);
|
|
|
4761 g_object_unref(plain_font);
|
|
|
4762 }
|
|
|
4763
|
|
|
4764 #else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
4765
|
|
|
4766 /*
|
|
|
4767 * There is only one excuse I can give for the following attempt to manage font
|
|
|
4768 * styles:
|
|
|
4769 *
|
|
|
4770 * I HATE THE BRAIN DEAD WAY X11 IS HANDLING FONTS (--mdcki)
|
|
|
4771 * (Me too. --danielk)
|
|
|
4772 */
|
|
|
4773 static void
|
|
|
4774 get_styled_font_variants(char_u * font_name)
|
|
|
4775 {
|
|
|
4776 char *chunk[32];
|
|
|
4777 char *sdup;
|
|
|
4778 char *tmp;
|
|
|
4779 int len, i;
|
|
|
4780 GuiFont *styled_font[3];
|
|
|
4781
|
|
|
4782 styled_font[0] = &gui.bold_font;
|
|
|
4783 styled_font[1] = &gui.ital_font;
|
|
|
4784 styled_font[2] = &gui.boldital_font;
|
|
|
4785
|
|
|
4786 /* First free whatever was freviously there. */
|
|
|
4787 for (i = 0; i < 3; ++i)
|
|
|
4788 if (*styled_font[i])
|
|
|
4789 {
|
|
|
4790 gdk_font_unref(*styled_font[i]);
|
|
|
4791 *styled_font[i] = NULL;
|
|
|
4792 }
|
|
|
4793
|
|
|
4794 if ((sdup = g_strdup((const char *)font_name)) == NULL)
|
|
|
4795 return;
|
|
|
4796
|
|
|
4797 /* split up the whole */
|
|
|
4798 i = 0;
|
|
|
4799 for (tmp = sdup; *tmp != '\0'; ++tmp)
|
|
|
4800 {
|
|
|
4801 if (*tmp == '-')
|
|
|
4802 {
|
|
|
4803 *tmp = '\0';
|
|
|
4804
|
|
|
4805 if (i == 32)
|
|
|
4806 break;
|
|
|
4807
|
|
|
4808 chunk[i] = tmp + 1;
|
|
|
4809 ++i;
|
|
|
4810 }
|
|
|
4811 }
|
|
|
4812
|
|
|
4813 if (i == 14)
|
|
|
4814 {
|
|
|
4815 GdkFont *font = NULL;
|
|
|
4816 const char *bold_chunk[3] = { "bold", NULL, "bold" };
|
|
|
4817 const char *italic_chunk[3] = { NULL, "o", "o" };
|
|
|
4818
|
|
|
4819 /* font name was complete */
|
|
|
4820 len = strlen((const char *)font_name) + 32;
|
|
|
4821
|
|
|
4822 for (i = 0; i < 3; ++i)
|
|
|
4823 {
|
|
|
4824 char *styled_name;
|
|
|
4825 int j;
|
|
|
4826
|
|
|
4827 styled_name = (char *)alloc(len);
|
|
|
4828 if (styled_name == NULL)
|
|
|
4829 {
|
|
|
4830 g_free(sdup);
|
|
|
4831 return;
|
|
|
4832 }
|
|
|
4833
|
|
|
4834 *styled_name = '\0';
|
|
|
4835
|
|
|
4836 for (j = 0; j < 14; ++j)
|
|
|
4837 {
|
|
|
4838 strcat(styled_name, "-");
|
|
|
4839 if (j == 2 && bold_chunk[i] != NULL)
|
|
|
4840 strcat(styled_name, bold_chunk[i]);
|
|
|
4841 else if (j == 3 && italic_chunk[i] != NULL)
|
|
|
4842 strcat(styled_name, italic_chunk[i]);
|
|
|
4843 else
|
|
|
4844 strcat(styled_name, chunk[j]);
|
|
|
4845 }
|
|
|
4846
|
|
|
4847 font = gui_mch_get_font((char_u *)styled_name, FALSE);
|
|
|
4848 if (font != NULL)
|
|
|
4849 *styled_font[i] = font;
|
|
|
4850
|
|
|
4851 vim_free(styled_name);
|
|
|
4852 }
|
|
|
4853 }
|
|
|
4854
|
|
|
4855 g_free(sdup);
|
|
|
4856 }
|
|
|
4857 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
4858
|
|
|
4859 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
4860 static PangoEngineShape *default_shape_engine = NULL;
|
|
|
4861
|
|
|
4862 /*
|
|
|
4863 * Create a map from ASCII characters in the range [32,126] to glyphs
|
|
|
4864 * of the current font. This is used by gui_gtk2_draw_string() to skip
|
|
|
4865 * the itemize and shaping process for the most common case.
|
|
|
4866 */
|
|
|
4867 static void
|
|
|
4868 ascii_glyph_table_init(void)
|
|
|
4869 {
|
|
|
4870 char_u ascii_chars[128];
|
|
|
4871 PangoAttrList *attr_list;
|
|
|
4872 GList *item_list;
|
|
|
4873 int i;
|
|
|
4874
|
|
|
4875 if (gui.ascii_glyphs != NULL)
|
|
|
4876 pango_glyph_string_free(gui.ascii_glyphs);
|
|
|
4877 if (gui.ascii_font != NULL)
|
|
|
4878 g_object_unref(gui.ascii_font);
|
|
|
4879
|
|
|
4880 gui.ascii_glyphs = NULL;
|
|
|
4881 gui.ascii_font = NULL;
|
|
|
4882
|
|
|
4883 /* For safety, fill in question marks for the control characters. */
|
|
|
4884 for (i = 0; i < 32; ++i)
|
|
|
4885 ascii_chars[i] = '?';
|
|
|
4886 for (; i < 127; ++i)
|
|
|
4887 ascii_chars[i] = i;
|
|
|
4888 ascii_chars[i] = '?';
|
|
|
4889
|
|
|
4890 attr_list = pango_attr_list_new();
|
|
|
4891 item_list = pango_itemize(gui.text_context, (const char *)ascii_chars,
|
|
|
4892 0, sizeof(ascii_chars), attr_list, NULL);
|
|
|
4893
|
|
|
4894 if (item_list != NULL && item_list->next == NULL) /* play safe */
|
|
|
4895 {
|
|
|
4896 PangoItem *item;
|
|
|
4897 int width;
|
|
|
4898
|
|
|
4899 item = (PangoItem *)item_list->data;
|
|
|
4900 width = gui.char_width * PANGO_SCALE;
|
|
|
4901
|
|
|
4902 /* Remember the shape engine used for ASCII. */
|
|
|
4903 default_shape_engine = item->analysis.shape_engine;
|
|
|
4904
|
|
|
4905 gui.ascii_font = item->analysis.font;
|
|
|
4906 g_object_ref(gui.ascii_font);
|
|
|
4907
|
|
|
4908 gui.ascii_glyphs = pango_glyph_string_new();
|
|
|
4909
|
|
|
4910 pango_shape((const char *)ascii_chars, sizeof(ascii_chars),
|
|
|
4911 &item->analysis, gui.ascii_glyphs);
|
|
|
4912
|
|
|
4913 g_return_if_fail(gui.ascii_glyphs->num_glyphs == sizeof(ascii_chars));
|
|
|
4914
|
|
|
4915 for (i = 0; i < gui.ascii_glyphs->num_glyphs; ++i)
|
|
|
4916 {
|
|
|
4917 PangoGlyphGeometry *geom;
|
|
|
4918
|
|
|
4919 geom = &gui.ascii_glyphs->glyphs[i].geometry;
|
|
|
4920 geom->x_offset += MAX(0, width - geom->width) / 2;
|
|
|
4921 geom->width = width;
|
|
|
4922 }
|
|
|
4923 }
|
|
|
4924
|
|
|
4925 g_list_foreach(item_list, (GFunc)&pango_item_free, NULL);
|
|
|
4926 g_list_free(item_list);
|
|
|
4927 pango_attr_list_unref(attr_list);
|
|
|
4928 }
|
|
|
4929 #endif /* HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
4930
|
|
|
4931 /*
|
|
|
4932 * Initialize Vim to use the font or fontset with the given name.
|
|
|
4933 * Return FAIL if the font could not be loaded, OK otherwise.
|
|
|
4934 */
|
|
|
4935 /*ARGSUSED1*/
|
|
|
4936 int
|
|
|
4937 gui_mch_init_font(char_u *font_name, int fontset)
|
|
|
4938 {
|
|
|
4939 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
4940 PangoFontDescription *font_desc;
|
|
|
4941 PangoLayout *layout;
|
|
|
4942 int width;
|
|
|
4943
|
|
|
4944 /* If font_name is NULL, this means to use the default, which should
|
|
|
4945 * be present on all proper Pango/fontconfig installations. */
|
|
|
4946 if (font_name == NULL)
|
|
|
4947 font_name = (char_u *)DEFAULT_FONT;
|
|
|
4948
|
|
|
4949 font_desc = gui_mch_get_font(font_name, FALSE);
|
|
|
4950
|
|
|
4951 if (font_desc == NULL)
|
|
|
4952 return FAIL;
|
|
|
4953
|
|
|
4954 gui_mch_free_font(gui.norm_font);
|
|
|
4955 gui.norm_font = font_desc;
|
|
|
4956
|
|
|
4957 pango_context_set_font_description(gui.text_context, font_desc);
|
|
|
4958
|
|
|
4959 layout = pango_layout_new(gui.text_context);
|
|
|
4960 pango_layout_set_text(layout, "MW", 2);
|
|
|
4961 pango_layout_get_size(layout, &width, NULL);
|
|
|
4962 /*
|
|
|
4963 * Set char_width to half the width obtained from pango_layout_get_size()
|
|
|
4964 * for CJK fixed_width/bi-width fonts. An unpatched version of Xft leads
|
|
|
4965 * Pango to use the same width for both non-CJK characters (e.g. Latin
|
|
|
4966 * letters and numbers) and CJK characters. This results in 's p a c e d
|
|
|
4967 * o u t' rendering when a CJK 'fixed width' font is used. To work around
|
|
|
4968 * that, divide the width returned by Pango by 2 if cjk_width is equal to
|
|
|
4969 * width for CJK fonts.
|
|
|
4970 *
|
|
|
4971 * For related bugs, see:
|
|
|
4972 * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=106618
|
|
|
4973 * http://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=106624
|
|
|
4974 *
|
|
|
4975 * With this, for all four of the following cases, Vim works fine:
|
|
|
4976 * guifont=CJK_fixed_width_font
|
|
|
4977 * guifont=Non_CJK_fixed_font
|
|
|
4978 * guifont=Non_CJK_fixed_font,CJK_Fixed_font
|
|
|
4979 * guifont=Non_CJK_fixed_font guifontwide=CJK_fixed_font
|
|
|
4980 */
|
|
|
4981 if (is_cjk_font(gui.norm_font))
|
|
|
4982 {
|
|
|
4983 int cjk_width;
|
|
|
4984
|
|
|
4985 /* Measure the text extent of U+4E00 and U+4E8C */
|
|
|
4986 pango_layout_set_text(layout, "\344\270\200\344\272\214", -1);
|
|
|
4987 pango_layout_get_size(layout, &cjk_width, NULL);
|
|
|
4988
|
|
|
4989 if (width == cjk_width) /* Xft not patched */
|
|
|
4990 width /= 2;
|
|
|
4991 }
|
|
|
4992 g_object_unref(layout);
|
|
|
4993
|
|
|
4994 gui.char_width = (width / 2 + PANGO_SCALE - 1) / PANGO_SCALE;
|
|
|
4995
|
|
|
4996 /* A zero width may cause a crash. Happens for semi-invalid fontsets. */
|
|
|
4997 if (gui.char_width <= 0)
|
|
|
4998 gui.char_width = 8;
|
|
|
4999
|
|
445
|
5000 gui_mch_adjust_charheight();
|
|
7
|
5001
|
|
|
5002 /* Set the fontname, which will be used for information purposes */
|
|
|
5003 hl_set_font_name(font_name);
|
|
|
5004
|
|
|
5005 get_styled_font_variants();
|
|
|
5006 ascii_glyph_table_init();
|
|
|
5007
|
|
|
5008 /* Avoid unnecessary overhead if 'guifontwide' is equal to 'guifont'. */
|
|
|
5009 if (gui.wide_font != NULL
|
|
|
5010 && pango_font_description_equal(gui.norm_font, gui.wide_font))
|
|
|
5011 {
|
|
|
5012 pango_font_description_free(gui.wide_font);
|
|
|
5013 gui.wide_font = NULL;
|
|
|
5014 }
|
|
|
5015
|
|
|
5016 #else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
5017
|
|
|
5018 GdkFont *font = NULL;
|
|
|
5019
|
|
|
5020 # ifdef FEAT_XFONTSET
|
|
|
5021 /* Try loading a fontset. If this fails we try loading a normal font. */
|
|
|
5022 if (fontset && font_name != NULL)
|
|
|
5023 font = gui_mch_get_fontset(font_name, TRUE, TRUE);
|
|
|
5024
|
|
|
5025 if (font == NULL)
|
|
|
5026 # endif
|
|
|
5027 {
|
|
|
5028 /* If font_name is NULL, this means to use the default, which should
|
|
|
5029 * be present on all X11 servers. */
|
|
|
5030 if (font_name == NULL)
|
|
|
5031 font_name = (char_u *)DEFAULT_FONT;
|
|
|
5032 font = gui_mch_get_font(font_name, FALSE);
|
|
|
5033 }
|
|
|
5034
|
|
|
5035 if (font == NULL)
|
|
|
5036 return FAIL;
|
|
|
5037
|
|
|
5038 gui_mch_free_font(gui.norm_font);
|
|
|
5039 # ifdef FEAT_XFONTSET
|
|
|
5040 gui_mch_free_fontset(gui.fontset);
|
|
|
5041 if (font->type == GDK_FONT_FONTSET)
|
|
|
5042 {
|
|
|
5043 gui.norm_font = NOFONT;
|
|
|
5044 gui.fontset = (GuiFontset)font;
|
|
|
5045 /* Use two bytes, this works around the problem that the result would
|
|
|
5046 * be zero if no 8-bit font was found. */
|
|
|
5047 gui.char_width = gdk_string_width(font, "xW") / 2;
|
|
|
5048 }
|
|
|
5049 else
|
|
|
5050 # endif
|
|
|
5051 {
|
|
|
5052 gui.norm_font = font;
|
|
|
5053 # ifdef FEAT_XFONTSET
|
|
|
5054 gui.fontset = NOFONTSET;
|
|
|
5055 # endif
|
|
|
5056 gui.char_width = ((XFontStruct *)
|
|
|
5057 GDK_FONT_XFONT(font))->max_bounds.width;
|
|
|
5058 }
|
|
|
5059
|
|
|
5060 /* A zero width may cause a crash. Happens for semi-invalid fontsets. */
|
|
|
5061 if (gui.char_width <= 0)
|
|
|
5062 gui.char_width = 8;
|
|
|
5063
|
|
|
5064 gui.char_height = font->ascent + font->descent + p_linespace;
|
|
|
5065 gui.char_ascent = font->ascent + p_linespace / 2;
|
|
|
5066
|
|
|
5067 /* A not-positive value of char_height may crash Vim. Only happens
|
|
|
5068 * if 'linespace' is negative (which does make sense sometimes). */
|
|
|
5069 gui.char_ascent = MAX(gui.char_ascent, 0);
|
|
|
5070 gui.char_height = MAX(gui.char_height, gui.char_ascent + 1);
|
|
|
5071
|
|
|
5072 /* Set the fontname, which will be used for information purposes */
|
|
|
5073 hl_set_font_name(font_name);
|
|
|
5074
|
|
|
5075 if (font->type != GDK_FONT_FONTSET)
|
|
|
5076 get_styled_font_variants(font_name);
|
|
|
5077
|
|
|
5078 /* Synchronize the fonts used in user input dialogs, since otherwise
|
|
|
5079 * search/replace will be esp. annoying in case of international font
|
|
|
5080 * usage.
|
|
|
5081 */
|
|
|
5082 gui_gtk_synch_fonts();
|
|
|
5083
|
|
|
5084 # ifdef FEAT_XIM
|
|
|
5085 /* Adjust input management behaviour to the capabilities of the new
|
|
|
5086 * fontset */
|
|
|
5087 xim_decide_input_style();
|
|
|
5088 if (xim_get_status_area_height())
|
|
|
5089 {
|
|
|
5090 /* Status area is required. Just create the empty container so that
|
|
|
5091 * mainwin will allocate the extra space for status area. */
|
|
|
5092 GtkWidget *alignment = gtk_alignment_new((gfloat)0.5, (gfloat)0.5,
|
|
|
5093 (gfloat)1.0, (gfloat)1.0);
|
|
|
5094
|
|
|
5095 gtk_widget_set_usize(alignment, 20, gui.char_height + 2);
|
|
|
5096 gtk_box_pack_end(GTK_BOX(GTK_BIN(gui.mainwin)->child),
|
|
|
5097 alignment, FALSE, FALSE, 0);
|
|
|
5098 gtk_widget_show(alignment);
|
|
|
5099 }
|
|
|
5100 # endif
|
|
|
5101 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
5102
|
|
|
5103 /* Preserve the logical dimensions of the screen. */
|
|
791
|
5104 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0);
|
|
7
|
5105
|
|
|
5106 return OK;
|
|
|
5107 }
|
|
|
5108
|
|
|
5109 /*
|
|
|
5110 * Get a reference to the font "name".
|
|
|
5111 * Return zero for failure.
|
|
|
5112 */
|
|
|
5113 GuiFont
|
|
|
5114 gui_mch_get_font(char_u *name, int report_error)
|
|
|
5115 {
|
|
|
5116 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
5117 PangoFontDescription *font;
|
|
|
5118 #else
|
|
|
5119 GdkFont *font;
|
|
|
5120 #endif
|
|
|
5121
|
|
|
5122 /* can't do this when GUI is not running */
|
|
|
5123 if (!gui.in_use || name == NULL)
|
|
|
5124 return NULL;
|
|
|
5125
|
|
|
5126 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
5127 if (output_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
5128 {
|
|
|
5129 char_u *buf;
|
|
|
5130
|
|
|
5131 buf = string_convert(&output_conv, name, NULL);
|
|
|
5132 if (buf != NULL)
|
|
|
5133 {
|
|
|
5134 font = pango_font_description_from_string((const char *)buf);
|
|
|
5135 vim_free(buf);
|
|
|
5136 }
|
|
|
5137 else
|
|
|
5138 font = NULL;
|
|
|
5139 }
|
|
|
5140 else
|
|
|
5141 font = pango_font_description_from_string((const char *)name);
|
|
|
5142
|
|
|
5143 if (font != NULL)
|
|
|
5144 {
|
|
|
5145 PangoFont *real_font;
|
|
|
5146
|
|
|
5147 /* pango_context_load_font() bails out if no font size is set */
|
|
|
5148 if (pango_font_description_get_size(font) <= 0)
|
|
|
5149 pango_font_description_set_size(font, 10 * PANGO_SCALE);
|
|
|
5150
|
|
|
5151 real_font = pango_context_load_font(gui.text_context, font);
|
|
|
5152
|
|
|
5153 if (real_font == NULL)
|
|
|
5154 {
|
|
|
5155 pango_font_description_free(font);
|
|
|
5156 font = NULL;
|
|
|
5157 }
|
|
|
5158 else
|
|
|
5159 g_object_unref(real_font);
|
|
|
5160 }
|
|
|
5161 #else
|
|
|
5162 font = gdk_font_load((const gchar *)name);
|
|
|
5163 #endif
|
|
|
5164
|
|
|
5165 if (font == NULL)
|
|
|
5166 {
|
|
|
5167 if (report_error)
|
|
|
5168 EMSG2(_(e_font), name);
|
|
|
5169 return NULL;
|
|
|
5170 }
|
|
|
5171
|
|
|
5172 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
5173 /*
|
|
|
5174 * The fixed-width check has been disabled for GTK+ 2. Rationale:
|
|
|
5175 *
|
|
|
5176 * - The check tends to report false positives, particularly
|
|
|
5177 * in non-Latin locales or with old X fonts.
|
|
|
5178 * - Thanks to our fixed-width hack in gui_gtk2_draw_string(),
|
|
|
5179 * GTK+ 2 Vim is actually capable of displaying variable width
|
|
|
5180 * fonts. Those will just be spaced out like in AA xterm.
|
|
|
5181 * - Failing here for the default font causes GUI startup to fail
|
|
|
5182 * even with wiped out configuration files.
|
|
|
5183 * - The font dialog displays all fonts unfiltered, and it's rather
|
|
|
5184 * annoying if 95% of the listed fonts produce an error message.
|
|
|
5185 */
|
|
|
5186 # if 0
|
|
|
5187 {
|
|
|
5188 /* Check that this is a mono-spaced font. Naturally, this is a bit
|
|
|
5189 * hackish -- fixed-width isn't really suitable for i18n text :/ */
|
|
|
5190 PangoLayout *layout;
|
|
|
5191 unsigned int i;
|
|
|
5192 int last_width = -1;
|
|
|
5193 const char test_chars[] = { 'W', 'i', ',', 'x' }; /* arbitrary */
|
|
|
5194
|
|
|
5195 layout = pango_layout_new(gui.text_context);
|
|
|
5196 pango_layout_set_font_description(layout, font);
|
|
|
5197
|
|
|
5198 for (i = 0; i < G_N_ELEMENTS(test_chars); ++i)
|
|
|
5199 {
|
|
|
5200 int width;
|
|
|
5201
|
|
|
5202 pango_layout_set_text(layout, &test_chars[i], 1);
|
|
|
5203 pango_layout_get_size(layout, &width, NULL);
|
|
|
5204
|
|
|
5205 if (last_width >= 0 && width != last_width)
|
|
|
5206 {
|
|
|
5207 pango_font_description_free(font);
|
|
|
5208 font = NULL;
|
|
|
5209 break;
|
|
|
5210 }
|
|
|
5211
|
|
|
5212 last_width = width;
|
|
|
5213 }
|
|
|
5214
|
|
|
5215 g_object_unref(layout);
|
|
|
5216 }
|
|
|
5217 # endif
|
|
|
5218 #else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
5219 {
|
|
|
5220 XFontStruct *xfont;
|
|
|
5221
|
|
|
5222 /* reference this font as being in use */
|
|
|
5223 gdk_font_ref(font);
|
|
|
5224
|
|
|
5225 /* Check that this is a mono-spaced font.
|
|
|
5226 */
|
|
|
5227 xfont = (XFontStruct *) GDK_FONT_XFONT(font);
|
|
|
5228
|
|
|
5229 if (xfont->max_bounds.width != xfont->min_bounds.width)
|
|
|
5230 {
|
|
|
5231 gdk_font_unref(font);
|
|
|
5232 font = NULL;
|
|
|
5233 }
|
|
|
5234 }
|
|
|
5235 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
5236
|
|
|
5237 #if !defined(HAVE_GTK2) || 0 /* disabled for GTK+ 2, see above */
|
|
|
5238 if (font == NULL && report_error)
|
|
|
5239 EMSG2(_(e_fontwidth), name);
|
|
|
5240 #endif
|
|
|
5241
|
|
|
5242 return font;
|
|
|
5243 }
|
|
|
5244
|
|
39
|
5245 #if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
38
|
5246 /*
|
|
|
5247 * Return the name of font "font" in allocated memory.
|
|
|
5248 */
|
|
|
5249 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
5250 char_u *
|
|
|
5251 gui_mch_get_fontname(GuiFont font, char_u *name)
|
|
|
5252 {
|
|
39
|
5253 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
38
|
5254 if (font != NOFONT)
|
|
|
5255 {
|
|
|
5256 char *name = pango_font_description_to_string(font);
|
|
|
5257
|
|
|
5258 if (name != NULL)
|
|
|
5259 {
|
|
|
5260 char_u *s = vim_strsave((char_u *)name);
|
|
|
5261
|
|
|
5262 g_free(name);
|
|
|
5263 return s;
|
|
|
5264 }
|
|
|
5265 }
|
|
39
|
5266 # else
|
|
38
|
5267 /* Don't know how to get the name, return what we got. */
|
|
|
5268 if (name != NULL)
|
|
|
5269 return vim_strsave(name);
|
|
39
|
5270 # endif
|
|
38
|
5271 return NULL;
|
|
|
5272 }
|
|
39
|
5273 #endif
|
|
38
|
5274
|
|
7
|
5275 #if !defined(HAVE_GTK2) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
5276 /*
|
|
|
5277 * Set the current text font.
|
|
|
5278 * Since we create all GC on demand, we use just gui.current_font to
|
|
|
5279 * indicate the desired current font.
|
|
|
5280 */
|
|
|
5281 void
|
|
|
5282 gui_mch_set_font(GuiFont font)
|
|
|
5283 {
|
|
|
5284 gui.current_font = font;
|
|
|
5285 }
|
|
|
5286 #endif
|
|
|
5287
|
|
|
5288 #if defined(FEAT_XFONTSET) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
5289 /*
|
|
|
5290 * Set the current text fontset.
|
|
|
5291 */
|
|
|
5292 void
|
|
|
5293 gui_mch_set_fontset(GuiFontset fontset)
|
|
|
5294 {
|
|
|
5295 gui.current_font = fontset;
|
|
|
5296 }
|
|
|
5297 #endif
|
|
|
5298
|
|
|
5299 /*
|
|
|
5300 * If a font is not going to be used, free its structure.
|
|
|
5301 */
|
|
|
5302 void
|
|
|
5303 gui_mch_free_font(GuiFont font)
|
|
|
5304 {
|
|
|
5305 if (font != NOFONT)
|
|
|
5306 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
5307 pango_font_description_free(font);
|
|
|
5308 #else
|
|
|
5309 gdk_font_unref(font);
|
|
|
5310 #endif
|
|
|
5311 }
|
|
|
5312
|
|
|
5313 #if defined(FEAT_XFONTSET) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
5314 /*
|
|
|
5315 * If a fontset is not going to be used, free its structure.
|
|
|
5316 */
|
|
|
5317 void
|
|
|
5318 gui_mch_free_fontset(GuiFontset fontset)
|
|
|
5319 {
|
|
|
5320 if (fontset != NOFONTSET)
|
|
|
5321 gdk_font_unref(fontset);
|
|
|
5322 }
|
|
|
5323 #endif
|
|
|
5324
|
|
|
5325
|
|
|
5326 /*
|
|
|
5327 * Return the Pixel value (color) for the given color name. This routine was
|
|
|
5328 * pretty much taken from example code in the Silicon Graphics OSF/Motif
|
|
|
5329 * Programmer's Guide.
|
|
|
5330 * Return INVALCOLOR for error.
|
|
|
5331 */
|
|
|
5332 guicolor_T
|
|
|
5333 gui_mch_get_color(char_u *name)
|
|
|
5334 {
|
|
|
5335 /* A number of colors that some X11 systems don't have */
|
|
|
5336 static const char *const vimnames[][2] =
|
|
|
5337 {
|
|
|
5338 {"LightRed", "#FFBBBB"},
|
|
|
5339 {"LightGreen", "#88FF88"},
|
|
|
5340 {"LightMagenta", "#FFBBFF"},
|
|
|
5341 {"DarkCyan", "#008888"},
|
|
|
5342 {"DarkBlue", "#0000BB"},
|
|
|
5343 {"DarkRed", "#BB0000"},
|
|
|
5344 {"DarkMagenta", "#BB00BB"},
|
|
|
5345 {"DarkGrey", "#BBBBBB"},
|
|
|
5346 {"DarkYellow", "#BBBB00"},
|
|
|
5347 {NULL, NULL}
|
|
|
5348 };
|
|
|
5349
|
|
|
5350 if (!gui.in_use) /* can't do this when GUI not running */
|
|
|
5351 return INVALCOLOR;
|
|
|
5352
|
|
|
5353 while (name != NULL)
|
|
|
5354 {
|
|
|
5355 GdkColor color;
|
|
|
5356 int parsed;
|
|
|
5357 int i;
|
|
|
5358
|
|
|
5359 parsed = gdk_color_parse((const char *)name, &color);
|
|
|
5360
|
|
|
5361 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2 /* ohh, lovely GTK+ 2, eases our pain :) */
|
|
|
5362 /*
|
|
|
5363 * Since we have already called gtk_set_locale here the bugger
|
|
|
5364 * XParseColor will accept only explicit color names in the language
|
|
|
5365 * of the current locale. However this will interferre with:
|
|
|
5366 * 1. Vim's global startup files
|
|
|
5367 * 2. Explicit color names in .vimrc
|
|
|
5368 *
|
|
|
5369 * Therefore we first try to parse the color in the current locale and
|
|
|
5370 * if it fails, we fall back to the portable "C" one.
|
|
|
5371 */
|
|
|
5372 if (!parsed)
|
|
|
5373 {
|
|
|
5374 char *current;
|
|
|
5375
|
|
|
5376 current = setlocale(LC_ALL, NULL);
|
|
|
5377 if (current != NULL)
|
|
|
5378 {
|
|
|
5379 char *saved;
|
|
|
5380
|
|
|
5381 saved = g_strdup(current);
|
|
|
5382 setlocale(LC_ALL, "C");
|
|
|
5383
|
|
|
5384 parsed = gdk_color_parse((const gchar *)name, &color);
|
|
|
5385
|
|
|
5386 setlocale(LC_ALL, saved);
|
|
|
5387 gtk_set_locale();
|
|
|
5388
|
|
|
5389 g_free(saved);
|
|
|
5390 }
|
|
|
5391 }
|
|
|
5392 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
5393
|
|
|
5394 if (parsed)
|
|
|
5395 {
|
|
|
5396 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
5397 gdk_colormap_alloc_color(gtk_widget_get_colormap(gui.drawarea),
|
|
|
5398 &color, FALSE, TRUE);
|
|
|
5399 #else
|
|
|
5400 gdk_color_alloc(gtk_widget_get_colormap(gui.drawarea), &color);
|
|
|
5401 #endif
|
|
|
5402 return (guicolor_T)color.pixel;
|
|
|
5403 }
|
|
|
5404 /* add a few builtin names and try again */
|
|
|
5405 for (i = 0; ; ++i)
|
|
|
5406 {
|
|
|
5407 if (vimnames[i][0] == NULL)
|
|
|
5408 {
|
|
|
5409 name = NULL;
|
|
|
5410 break;
|
|
|
5411 }
|
|
|
5412 if (STRICMP(name, vimnames[i][0]) == 0)
|
|
|
5413 {
|
|
|
5414 name = (char_u *)vimnames[i][1];
|
|
|
5415 break;
|
|
|
5416 }
|
|
|
5417 }
|
|
|
5418 }
|
|
|
5419
|
|
|
5420 return INVALCOLOR;
|
|
|
5421 }
|
|
|
5422
|
|
|
5423 /*
|
|
|
5424 * Set the current text foreground color.
|
|
|
5425 */
|
|
|
5426 void
|
|
|
5427 gui_mch_set_fg_color(guicolor_T color)
|
|
|
5428 {
|
|
|
5429 gui.fgcolor->pixel = (unsigned long)color;
|
|
|
5430 }
|
|
|
5431
|
|
|
5432 /*
|
|
|
5433 * Set the current text background color.
|
|
|
5434 */
|
|
|
5435 void
|
|
|
5436 gui_mch_set_bg_color(guicolor_T color)
|
|
|
5437 {
|
|
|
5438 gui.bgcolor->pixel = (unsigned long)color;
|
|
|
5439 }
|
|
|
5440
|
|
207
|
5441 /*
|
|
|
5442 * Set the current text special color.
|
|
|
5443 */
|
|
|
5444 void
|
|
|
5445 gui_mch_set_sp_color(guicolor_T color)
|
|
|
5446 {
|
|
|
5447 gui.spcolor->pixel = (unsigned long)color;
|
|
|
5448 }
|
|
|
5449
|
|
7
|
5450 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
5451 /*
|
|
|
5452 * Function-like convenience macro for the sake of efficiency.
|
|
|
5453 */
|
|
|
5454 #define INSERT_PANGO_ATTR(Attribute, AttrList, Start, End) \
|
|
|
5455 G_STMT_START{ \
|
|
|
5456 PangoAttribute *tmp_attr_; \
|
|
|
5457 tmp_attr_ = (Attribute); \
|
|
|
5458 tmp_attr_->start_index = (Start); \
|
|
|
5459 tmp_attr_->end_index = (End); \
|
|
|
5460 pango_attr_list_insert((AttrList), tmp_attr_); \
|
|
|
5461 }G_STMT_END
|
|
|
5462
|
|
|
5463 static void
|
|
|
5464 apply_wide_font_attr(char_u *s, int len, PangoAttrList *attr_list)
|
|
|
5465 {
|
|
|
5466 char_u *start = NULL;
|
|
|
5467 char_u *p;
|
|
|
5468 int uc;
|
|
|
5469
|
|
|
5470 for (p = s; p < s + len; p += utf_byte2len(*p))
|
|
|
5471 {
|
|
|
5472 uc = utf_ptr2char(p);
|
|
|
5473
|
|
|
5474 if (start == NULL)
|
|
|
5475 {
|
|
|
5476 if (uc >= 0x80 && utf_char2cells(uc) == 2)
|
|
|
5477 start = p;
|
|
|
5478 }
|
|
|
5479 else if (uc < 0x80 /* optimization shortcut */
|
|
|
5480 || (utf_char2cells(uc) != 2 && !utf_iscomposing(uc)))
|
|
|
5481 {
|
|
|
5482 INSERT_PANGO_ATTR(pango_attr_font_desc_new(gui.wide_font),
|
|
|
5483 attr_list, start - s, p - s);
|
|
|
5484 start = NULL;
|
|
|
5485 }
|
|
|
5486 }
|
|
|
5487
|
|
|
5488 if (start != NULL)
|
|
|
5489 INSERT_PANGO_ATTR(pango_attr_font_desc_new(gui.wide_font),
|
|
|
5490 attr_list, start - s, len);
|
|
|
5491 }
|
|
|
5492
|
|
|
5493 static int
|
|
|
5494 count_cluster_cells(char_u *s, PangoItem *item,
|
|
|
5495 PangoGlyphString* glyphs, int i,
|
|
|
5496 int *cluster_width,
|
|
|
5497 int *last_glyph_rbearing)
|
|
|
5498 {
|
|
|
5499 char_u *p;
|
|
|
5500 int next; /* glyph start index of next cluster */
|
|
|
5501 int start, end; /* string segment of current cluster */
|
|
|
5502 int width; /* real cluster width in Pango units */
|
|
|
5503 int uc;
|
|
|
5504 int cellcount = 0;
|
|
|
5505
|
|
|
5506 width = glyphs->glyphs[i].geometry.width;
|
|
|
5507
|
|
|
5508 for (next = i + 1; next < glyphs->num_glyphs; ++next)
|
|
|
5509 {
|
|
|
5510 if (glyphs->glyphs[next].attr.is_cluster_start)
|
|
|
5511 break;
|
|
|
5512 else if (glyphs->glyphs[next].geometry.width > width)
|
|
|
5513 width = glyphs->glyphs[next].geometry.width;
|
|
|
5514 }
|
|
|
5515
|
|
|
5516 start = item->offset + glyphs->log_clusters[i];
|
|
|
5517 end = item->offset + ((next < glyphs->num_glyphs) ?
|
|
|
5518 glyphs->log_clusters[next] : item->length);
|
|
|
5519
|
|
|
5520 for (p = s + start; p < s + end; p += utf_byte2len(*p))
|
|
|
5521 {
|
|
|
5522 uc = utf_ptr2char(p);
|
|
|
5523 if (uc < 0x80)
|
|
|
5524 ++cellcount;
|
|
|
5525 else if (!utf_iscomposing(uc))
|
|
|
5526 cellcount += utf_char2cells(uc);
|
|
|
5527 }
|
|
|
5528
|
|
|
5529 if (last_glyph_rbearing != NULL
|
|
|
5530 && cellcount > 0 && next == glyphs->num_glyphs)
|
|
|
5531 {
|
|
|
5532 PangoRectangle ink_rect;
|
|
|
5533 /*
|
|
|
5534 * If a certain combining mark had to be taken from a non-monospace
|
|
|
5535 * font, we have to compensate manually by adapting x_offset according
|
|
|
5536 * to the ink extents of the previous glyph.
|
|
|
5537 */
|
|
|
5538 pango_font_get_glyph_extents(item->analysis.font,
|
|
|
5539 glyphs->glyphs[i].glyph,
|
|
|
5540 &ink_rect, NULL);
|
|
|
5541
|
|
|
5542 if (PANGO_RBEARING(ink_rect) > 0)
|
|
|
5543 *last_glyph_rbearing = PANGO_RBEARING(ink_rect);
|
|
|
5544 }
|
|
|
5545
|
|
|
5546 if (cellcount > 0)
|
|
|
5547 *cluster_width = width;
|
|
|
5548
|
|
|
5549 return cellcount;
|
|
|
5550 }
|
|
|
5551
|
|
|
5552 /*
|
|
|
5553 * If there are only combining characters in the cluster, we cannot just
|
|
|
5554 * change the width of the previous glyph since there is none. Therefore
|
|
|
5555 * some guesswork is needed.
|
|
|
5556 *
|
|
|
5557 * If ink_rect.x is negative Pango apparently has taken care of the composing
|
|
|
5558 * by itself. Actually setting x_offset = 0 should be sufficient then, but due
|
|
|
5559 * to problems with composing from different fonts we still need to fine-tune
|
|
|
5560 * x_offset to avoid uglyness.
|
|
|
5561 *
|
|
|
5562 * If ink_rect.x is not negative, force overstriking by pointing x_offset to
|
|
|
5563 * the position of the previous glyph. Apparently this happens only with old
|
|
|
5564 * X fonts which don't provide the special combining information needed by
|
|
|
5565 * Pango.
|
|
|
5566 */
|
|
|
5567 static void
|
|
|
5568 setup_zero_width_cluster(PangoItem *item, PangoGlyphInfo *glyph,
|
|
|
5569 int last_cellcount, int last_cluster_width,
|
|
|
5570 int last_glyph_rbearing)
|
|
|
5571 {
|
|
|
5572 PangoRectangle ink_rect;
|
|
|
5573 PangoRectangle logical_rect;
|
|
|
5574 int width;
|
|
|
5575
|
|
|
5576 width = last_cellcount * gui.char_width * PANGO_SCALE;
|
|
|
5577 glyph->geometry.x_offset = -width + MAX(0, width - last_cluster_width) / 2;
|
|
|
5578 glyph->geometry.width = 0;
|
|
|
5579
|
|
|
5580 pango_font_get_glyph_extents(item->analysis.font,
|
|
|
5581 glyph->glyph,
|
|
|
5582 &ink_rect, &logical_rect);
|
|
|
5583 if (ink_rect.x < 0)
|
|
|
5584 {
|
|
|
5585 glyph->geometry.x_offset += last_glyph_rbearing;
|
|
|
5586 glyph->geometry.y_offset = logical_rect.height
|
|
|
5587 - (gui.char_height - p_linespace) * PANGO_SCALE;
|
|
|
5588 }
|
|
|
5589 }
|
|
|
5590
|
|
|
5591 static void
|
|
|
5592 draw_glyph_string(int row, int col, int num_cells, int flags,
|
|
|
5593 PangoFont *font, PangoGlyphString *glyphs)
|
|
|
5594 {
|
|
|
5595 if (!(flags & DRAW_TRANSP))
|
|
|
5596 {
|
|
|
5597 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.bgcolor);
|
|
|
5598
|
|
|
5599 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
5600 gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
5601 TRUE,
|
|
|
5602 FILL_X(col),
|
|
|
5603 FILL_Y(row),
|
|
|
5604 num_cells * gui.char_width,
|
|
|
5605 gui.char_height);
|
|
|
5606 }
|
|
|
5607
|
|
|
5608 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.fgcolor);
|
|
|
5609
|
|
|
5610 gdk_draw_glyphs(gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
5611 gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
5612 font,
|
|
|
5613 TEXT_X(col),
|
|
|
5614 TEXT_Y(row),
|
|
|
5615 glyphs);
|
|
|
5616
|
|
|
5617 /* redraw the contents with an offset of 1 to emulate bold */
|
|
|
5618 if ((flags & DRAW_BOLD) && !gui.font_can_bold)
|
|
|
5619 gdk_draw_glyphs(gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
5620 gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
5621 font,
|
|
|
5622 TEXT_X(col) + 1,
|
|
|
5623 TEXT_Y(row),
|
|
|
5624 glyphs);
|
|
|
5625 }
|
|
|
5626
|
|
|
5627 #endif /* HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
5628
|
|
207
|
5629 /*
|
|
|
5630 * Draw underline and undercurl at the bottom of the character cell.
|
|
|
5631 */
|
|
|
5632 static void
|
|
|
5633 draw_under(int flags, int row, int col, int cells)
|
|
|
5634 {
|
|
|
5635 int i;
|
|
|
5636 int offset;
|
|
|
5637 const static int val[8] = {1, 0, 0, 0, 1, 2, 2, 2 };
|
|
|
5638 int y = FILL_Y(row + 1) - 1;
|
|
|
5639
|
|
|
5640 /* Undercurl: draw curl at the bottom of the character cell. */
|
|
|
5641 if (flags & DRAW_UNDERC)
|
|
|
5642 {
|
|
|
5643 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.spcolor);
|
|
|
5644 for (i = FILL_X(col); i < FILL_X(col + cells); ++i)
|
|
|
5645 {
|
|
|
5646 offset = val[i % 8];
|
|
|
5647 gdk_draw_point(gui.drawarea->window, gui.text_gc, i, y - offset);
|
|
|
5648 }
|
|
|
5649 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.fgcolor);
|
|
|
5650 }
|
|
|
5651
|
|
|
5652 /* Underline: draw a line at the bottom of the character cell. */
|
|
|
5653 if (flags & DRAW_UNDERL)
|
|
|
5654 {
|
|
|
5655 /* When p_linespace is 0, overwrite the bottom row of pixels.
|
|
|
5656 * Otherwise put the line just below the character. */
|
|
|
5657 if (p_linespace > 1)
|
|
|
5658 y -= p_linespace - 1;
|
|
|
5659 gdk_draw_line(gui.drawarea->window, gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
5660 FILL_X(col), y,
|
|
|
5661 FILL_X(col + cells) - 1, y);
|
|
|
5662 }
|
|
|
5663 }
|
|
|
5664
|
|
7
|
5665 #if defined(HAVE_GTK2) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
5666 int
|
|
|
5667 gui_gtk2_draw_string(int row, int col, char_u *s, int len, int flags)
|
|
|
5668 {
|
|
|
5669 GdkRectangle area; /* area for clip mask */
|
|
|
5670 PangoGlyphString *glyphs; /* glyphs of current item */
|
|
|
5671 int column_offset = 0; /* column offset in cells */
|
|
|
5672 int i;
|
|
|
5673 char_u *conv_buf = NULL; /* result of UTF-8 conversion */
|
|
|
5674 char_u *new_conv_buf;
|
|
|
5675 int convlen;
|
|
|
5676 char_u *sp, *bp;
|
|
|
5677 int plen;
|
|
|
5678
|
|
|
5679 if (gui.text_context == NULL || gui.drawarea->window == NULL)
|
|
|
5680 return len;
|
|
|
5681
|
|
|
5682 if (output_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
5683 {
|
|
|
5684 /*
|
|
|
5685 * Convert characters from 'encoding' to 'termencoding', which is set
|
|
|
5686 * to UTF-8 by gui_mch_init(). did_set_string_option() in option.c
|
|
|
5687 * prohibits changing this to something else than UTF-8 if the GUI is
|
|
|
5688 * in use.
|
|
|
5689 */
|
|
|
5690 convlen = len;
|
|
|
5691 conv_buf = string_convert(&output_conv, s, &convlen);
|
|
|
5692 g_return_val_if_fail(conv_buf != NULL, len);
|
|
|
5693
|
|
|
5694 /* Correct for differences in char width: some chars are
|
|
|
5695 * double-wide in 'encoding' but single-wide in utf-8. Add a space to
|
|
|
5696 * compensate for that. */
|
|
|
5697 for (sp = s, bp = conv_buf; sp < s + len && bp < conv_buf + convlen; )
|
|
|
5698 {
|
|
474
|
5699 plen = utf_ptr2len(bp);
|
|
7
|
5700 if ((*mb_ptr2cells)(sp) == 2 && utf_ptr2cells(bp) == 1)
|
|
|
5701 {
|
|
|
5702 new_conv_buf = alloc(convlen + 2);
|
|
|
5703 if (new_conv_buf == NULL)
|
|
|
5704 return len;
|
|
|
5705 plen += bp - conv_buf;
|
|
|
5706 mch_memmove(new_conv_buf, conv_buf, plen);
|
|
|
5707 new_conv_buf[plen] = ' ';
|
|
|
5708 mch_memmove(new_conv_buf + plen + 1, conv_buf + plen,
|
|
|
5709 convlen - plen + 1);
|
|
|
5710 vim_free(conv_buf);
|
|
|
5711 conv_buf = new_conv_buf;
|
|
|
5712 ++convlen;
|
|
|
5713 bp = conv_buf + plen;
|
|
|
5714 plen = 1;
|
|
|
5715 }
|
|
474
|
5716 sp += (*mb_ptr2len)(sp);
|
|
7
|
5717 bp += plen;
|
|
|
5718 }
|
|
|
5719 s = conv_buf;
|
|
|
5720 len = convlen;
|
|
|
5721 }
|
|
|
5722
|
|
|
5723 /*
|
|
|
5724 * Restrict all drawing to the current screen line in order to prevent
|
|
|
5725 * fuzzy font lookups from messing up the screen.
|
|
|
5726 */
|
|
|
5727 area.x = gui.border_offset;
|
|
|
5728 area.y = FILL_Y(row);
|
|
|
5729 area.width = gui.num_cols * gui.char_width;
|
|
|
5730 area.height = gui.char_height;
|
|
|
5731
|
|
|
5732 gdk_gc_set_clip_origin(gui.text_gc, 0, 0);
|
|
|
5733 gdk_gc_set_clip_rectangle(gui.text_gc, &area);
|
|
|
5734
|
|
|
5735 glyphs = pango_glyph_string_new();
|
|
|
5736
|
|
|
5737 /*
|
|
|
5738 * Optimization hack: If possible, skip the itemize and shaping process
|
|
|
5739 * for pure ASCII strings. This optimization is particularly effective
|
|
|
5740 * because Vim draws space characters to clear parts of the screen.
|
|
|
5741 */
|
|
|
5742 if (!(flags & DRAW_ITALIC)
|
|
|
5743 && !((flags & DRAW_BOLD) && gui.font_can_bold)
|
|
|
5744 && gui.ascii_glyphs != NULL)
|
|
|
5745 {
|
|
|
5746 char_u *p;
|
|
|
5747
|
|
|
5748 for (p = s; p < s + len; ++p)
|
|
|
5749 if (*p & 0x80)
|
|
|
5750 goto not_ascii;
|
|
|
5751
|
|
|
5752 pango_glyph_string_set_size(glyphs, len);
|
|
|
5753
|
|
|
5754 for (i = 0; i < len; ++i)
|
|
|
5755 {
|
|
|
5756 glyphs->glyphs[i] = gui.ascii_glyphs->glyphs[s[i]];
|
|
|
5757 glyphs->log_clusters[i] = i;
|
|
|
5758 }
|
|
|
5759
|
|
|
5760 draw_glyph_string(row, col, len, flags, gui.ascii_font, glyphs);
|
|
|
5761
|
|
|
5762 column_offset = len;
|
|
|
5763 }
|
|
|
5764 else
|
|
|
5765 not_ascii:
|
|
|
5766 {
|
|
|
5767 PangoAttrList *attr_list;
|
|
|
5768 GList *item_list;
|
|
|
5769 int cluster_width;
|
|
|
5770 int last_glyph_rbearing;
|
|
|
5771 int cells = 0; /* cells occupied by current cluster */
|
|
497
|
5772 #if 0
|
|
|
5773 int monospace13 = STRICMP(p_guifont, "monospace 13") == 0;
|
|
|
5774 #endif
|
|
7
|
5775
|
|
26
|
5776 /* Safety check: pango crashes when invoked with invalid utf-8
|
|
|
5777 * characters. */
|
|
|
5778 if (!utf_valid_string(s, s + len))
|
|
|
5779 {
|
|
|
5780 column_offset = len;
|
|
|
5781 goto skipitall;
|
|
|
5782 }
|
|
|
5783
|
|
7
|
5784 /* original width of the current cluster */
|
|
|
5785 cluster_width = PANGO_SCALE * gui.char_width;
|
|
|
5786
|
|
|
5787 /* right bearing of the last non-composing glyph */
|
|
|
5788 last_glyph_rbearing = PANGO_SCALE * gui.char_width;
|
|
|
5789
|
|
|
5790 attr_list = pango_attr_list_new();
|
|
|
5791
|
|
|
5792 /* If 'guifontwide' is set then use that for double-width characters.
|
|
|
5793 * Otherwise just go with 'guifont' and let Pango do its thing. */
|
|
|
5794 if (gui.wide_font != NULL)
|
|
|
5795 apply_wide_font_attr(s, len, attr_list);
|
|
|
5796
|
|
|
5797 if ((flags & DRAW_BOLD) && gui.font_can_bold)
|
|
|
5798 INSERT_PANGO_ATTR(pango_attr_weight_new(PANGO_WEIGHT_BOLD),
|
|
|
5799 attr_list, 0, len);
|
|
|
5800 if (flags & DRAW_ITALIC)
|
|
|
5801 INSERT_PANGO_ATTR(pango_attr_style_new(PANGO_STYLE_ITALIC),
|
|
|
5802 attr_list, 0, len);
|
|
|
5803 /*
|
|
|
5804 * Break the text into segments with consistent directional level
|
|
|
5805 * and shaping engine. Pure Latin text needs only a single segment,
|
|
|
5806 * so there's no need to worry about the loop's efficiency. Better
|
|
|
5807 * try to optimize elsewhere, e.g. reducing exposes and stuff :)
|
|
|
5808 */
|
|
|
5809 item_list = pango_itemize(gui.text_context,
|
|
|
5810 (const char *)s, 0, len, attr_list, NULL);
|
|
|
5811
|
|
|
5812 while (item_list != NULL)
|
|
|
5813 {
|
|
|
5814 PangoItem *item;
|
|
|
5815 int item_cells = 0; /* item length in cells */
|
|
|
5816
|
|
|
5817 item = (PangoItem *)item_list->data;
|
|
|
5818 item_list = g_list_delete_link(item_list, item_list);
|
|
|
5819 /*
|
|
|
5820 * Increment the bidirectional embedding level by 1 if it is not
|
|
|
5821 * even. An odd number means the output will be RTL, but we don't
|
|
|
5822 * want that since Vim handles right-to-left text on its own. It
|
|
|
5823 * would probably be sufficient to just set level = 0, but you can
|
|
|
5824 * never know :)
|
|
|
5825 *
|
|
|
5826 * Unfortunately we can't take advantage of Pango's ability to
|
|
|
5827 * render both LTR and RTL at the same time. In order to support
|
|
|
5828 * that, Vim's main screen engine would have to make use of Pango
|
|
|
5829 * functionality.
|
|
|
5830 */
|
|
|
5831 item->analysis.level = (item->analysis.level + 1) & (~1U);
|
|
|
5832
|
|
|
5833 /* HACK: Overrule the shape engine, we don't want shaping to be
|
|
|
5834 * done, because drawing the cursor would change the display. */
|
|
|
5835 item->analysis.shape_engine = default_shape_engine;
|
|
|
5836
|
|
|
5837 pango_shape((const char *)s + item->offset, item->length,
|
|
|
5838 &item->analysis, glyphs);
|
|
|
5839 /*
|
|
|
5840 * Fixed-width hack: iterate over the array and assign a fixed
|
|
|
5841 * width to each glyph, thus overriding the choice made by the
|
|
|
5842 * shaping engine. We use utf_char2cells() to determine the
|
|
|
5843 * number of cells needed.
|
|
|
5844 *
|
|
|
5845 * Also perform all kind of dark magic to get composing
|
|
|
5846 * characters right (and pretty too of course).
|
|
|
5847 */
|
|
|
5848 for (i = 0; i < glyphs->num_glyphs; ++i)
|
|
|
5849 {
|
|
|
5850 PangoGlyphInfo *glyph;
|
|
|
5851
|
|
|
5852 glyph = &glyphs->glyphs[i];
|
|
|
5853
|
|
|
5854 if (glyph->attr.is_cluster_start)
|
|
|
5855 {
|
|
|
5856 int cellcount;
|
|
|
5857
|
|
|
5858 cellcount = count_cluster_cells(
|
|
|
5859 s, item, glyphs, i, &cluster_width,
|
|
|
5860 (item_list != NULL) ? &last_glyph_rbearing : NULL);
|
|
|
5861
|
|
|
5862 if (cellcount > 0)
|
|
|
5863 {
|
|
|
5864 int width;
|
|
|
5865
|
|
|
5866 width = cellcount * gui.char_width * PANGO_SCALE;
|
|
|
5867 glyph->geometry.x_offset +=
|
|
|
5868 MAX(0, width - cluster_width) / 2;
|
|
|
5869 glyph->geometry.width = width;
|
|
|
5870 }
|
|
|
5871 else
|
|
|
5872 {
|
|
|
5873 /* If there are only combining characters in the
|
|
|
5874 * cluster, we cannot just change the width of the
|
|
|
5875 * previous glyph since there is none. Therefore
|
|
|
5876 * some guesswork is needed. */
|
|
|
5877 setup_zero_width_cluster(item, glyph, cells,
|
|
|
5878 cluster_width,
|
|
|
5879 last_glyph_rbearing);
|
|
|
5880 }
|
|
|
5881
|
|
|
5882 item_cells += cellcount;
|
|
|
5883 cells = cellcount;
|
|
|
5884 }
|
|
|
5885 else if (i > 0)
|
|
|
5886 {
|
|
|
5887 int width;
|
|
|
5888
|
|
|
5889 /* There is a previous glyph, so we deal with combining
|
|
|
5890 * characters the canonical way. That is, setting the
|
|
|
5891 * width of the previous glyph to 0. */
|
|
|
5892 glyphs->glyphs[i - 1].geometry.width = 0;
|
|
|
5893 width = cells * gui.char_width * PANGO_SCALE;
|
|
|
5894 glyph->geometry.x_offset +=
|
|
|
5895 MAX(0, width - cluster_width) / 2;
|
|
497
|
5896 #if 0
|
|
|
5897 /* Dirty hack: for "monospace 13" font there is a bug that
|
|
|
5898 * draws composing chars in the wrong position. Add
|
|
|
5899 * "width" to the offset to work around that. */
|
|
|
5900 if (monospace13)
|
|
|
5901 glyph->geometry.x_offset = width;
|
|
|
5902 #endif
|
|
|
5903
|
|
7
|
5904 glyph->geometry.width = width;
|
|
|
5905 }
|
|
|
5906 else /* i == 0 "cannot happen" */
|
|
|
5907 {
|
|
|
5908 glyph->geometry.width = 0;
|
|
|
5909 }
|
|
|
5910 }
|
|
|
5911
|
|
|
5912 /*** Aaaaand action! ***/
|
|
|
5913 draw_glyph_string(row, col + column_offset, item_cells,
|
|
|
5914 flags, item->analysis.font, glyphs);
|
|
|
5915
|
|
|
5916 pango_item_free(item);
|
|
|
5917
|
|
|
5918 column_offset += item_cells;
|
|
|
5919 }
|
|
|
5920
|
|
|
5921 pango_attr_list_unref(attr_list);
|
|
|
5922 }
|
|
|
5923
|
|
26
|
5924 skipitall:
|
|
207
|
5925 /* Draw underline and undercurl. */
|
|
|
5926 draw_under(flags, row, col, column_offset);
|
|
7
|
5927
|
|
|
5928 pango_glyph_string_free(glyphs);
|
|
|
5929 vim_free(conv_buf);
|
|
|
5930
|
|
|
5931 gdk_gc_set_clip_rectangle(gui.text_gc, NULL);
|
|
|
5932
|
|
|
5933 return column_offset;
|
|
|
5934 }
|
|
|
5935 #endif /* HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
5936
|
|
|
5937 #if !defined(HAVE_GTK2) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
5938 void
|
|
|
5939 gui_mch_draw_string(int row, int col, char_u *s, int len, int flags)
|
|
|
5940 {
|
|
|
5941 static XChar2b *buf = NULL;
|
|
|
5942 static int buflen = 0;
|
|
|
5943 int is_wide;
|
|
|
5944 XChar2b *text;
|
|
|
5945 int textlen;
|
|
|
5946 XFontStruct *xfont;
|
|
|
5947 char_u *p;
|
|
|
5948 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
5949 unsigned c;
|
|
|
5950 # endif
|
|
|
5951 int width;
|
|
|
5952
|
|
|
5953 if (gui.current_font == NULL || gui.drawarea->window == NULL)
|
|
|
5954 return;
|
|
|
5955
|
|
|
5956 /*
|
|
|
5957 * Yeah yeah apparently the font support in GTK+ 1.2 only cares for either:
|
|
|
5958 * asians or 8-bit fonts. It is broken there, but no wonder the whole font
|
|
|
5959 * stuff is broken in X11 in first place. And the internationalization API
|
|
|
5960 * isn't something you would really like to use.
|
|
|
5961 */
|
|
|
5962
|
|
|
5963 xfont = (XFontStruct *)((GdkFontPrivate*)gui.current_font)->xfont;
|
|
|
5964 is_wide = ((xfont->min_byte1 != 0 || xfont->max_byte1 != 0)
|
|
|
5965 # ifdef FEAT_XFONTSET
|
|
|
5966 && gui.fontset == NOFONTSET
|
|
|
5967 # endif
|
|
|
5968 );
|
|
|
5969
|
|
|
5970 if (is_wide)
|
|
|
5971 {
|
|
|
5972 /* Convert a byte sequence to 16 bit characters for the Gdk functions.
|
|
|
5973 * Need a buffer for the 16 bit characters. Keep it between calls,
|
|
|
5974 * because allocating it each time is slow. */
|
|
|
5975 if (buflen < len)
|
|
|
5976 {
|
|
|
5977 XtFree((char *)buf);
|
|
|
5978 buf = (XChar2b *)XtMalloc(len * sizeof(XChar2b));
|
|
|
5979 buflen = len;
|
|
|
5980 }
|
|
|
5981
|
|
|
5982 p = s;
|
|
|
5983 textlen = 0;
|
|
|
5984 width = 0;
|
|
|
5985 while (p < s + len)
|
|
|
5986 {
|
|
|
5987 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
5988 if (enc_utf8)
|
|
|
5989 {
|
|
|
5990 c = utf_ptr2char(p);
|
|
|
5991 if (c >= 0x10000) /* show chars > 0xffff as ? */
|
|
|
5992 c = 0xbf;
|
|
|
5993 buf[textlen].byte1 = c >> 8;
|
|
|
5994 buf[textlen].byte2 = c;
|
|
474
|
5995 p += utf_ptr2len(p);
|
|
7
|
5996 width += utf_char2cells(c);
|
|
|
5997 }
|
|
|
5998 else
|
|
|
5999 # endif
|
|
|
6000 {
|
|
|
6001 buf[textlen].byte1 = '\0'; /* high eight bits */
|
|
|
6002 buf[textlen].byte2 = *p; /* low eight bits */
|
|
|
6003 ++p;
|
|
|
6004 ++width;
|
|
|
6005 }
|
|
|
6006 ++textlen;
|
|
|
6007 }
|
|
|
6008 text = buf;
|
|
|
6009 textlen = textlen * 2;
|
|
|
6010 }
|
|
|
6011 else
|
|
|
6012 {
|
|
|
6013 text = (XChar2b *)s;
|
|
|
6014 textlen = len;
|
|
|
6015 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
6016 if (has_mbyte)
|
|
|
6017 {
|
|
|
6018 width = 0;
|
|
474
|
6019 for (p = s; p < s + len; p += (*mb_ptr2len)(p))
|
|
7
|
6020 width += (*mb_ptr2cells)(p);
|
|
|
6021 }
|
|
|
6022 else
|
|
|
6023 # endif
|
|
|
6024 width = len;
|
|
|
6025 }
|
|
|
6026
|
|
|
6027 if (!(flags & DRAW_TRANSP))
|
|
|
6028 {
|
|
|
6029 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.bgcolor);
|
|
|
6030 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
6031 gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
6032 TRUE,
|
|
|
6033 FILL_X(col), FILL_Y(row),
|
|
|
6034 width * gui.char_width, gui.char_height);
|
|
|
6035 }
|
|
|
6036 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.fgcolor);
|
|
|
6037 gdk_draw_text(gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
6038 gui.current_font,
|
|
|
6039 gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
6040 TEXT_X(col), TEXT_Y(row),
|
|
|
6041 (const gchar *)text, textlen);
|
|
|
6042
|
|
|
6043 /* redraw the contents with an offset of 1 to emulate bold */
|
|
|
6044 if (flags & DRAW_BOLD)
|
|
|
6045 gdk_draw_text(gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
6046 gui.current_font,
|
|
|
6047 gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
6048 TEXT_X(col) + 1, TEXT_Y(row),
|
|
|
6049 (const gchar *)text, textlen);
|
|
|
6050
|
|
207
|
6051 /* Draw underline and undercurl. */
|
|
|
6052 draw_under(flags, row, col, width);
|
|
7
|
6053 }
|
|
|
6054 #endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
6055
|
|
|
6056 /*
|
|
|
6057 * Return OK if the key with the termcap name "name" is supported.
|
|
|
6058 */
|
|
|
6059 int
|
|
|
6060 gui_mch_haskey(char_u *name)
|
|
|
6061 {
|
|
|
6062 int i;
|
|
|
6063
|
|
|
6064 for (i = 0; special_keys[i].key_sym != 0; i++)
|
|
|
6065 if (name[0] == special_keys[i].code0
|
|
|
6066 && name[1] == special_keys[i].code1)
|
|
|
6067 return OK;
|
|
|
6068 return FAIL;
|
|
|
6069 }
|
|
|
6070
|
|
|
6071 #if defined(FEAT_TITLE) \
|
|
|
6072 || (defined(FEAT_XIM) && !defined(HAVE_GTK2)) \
|
|
|
6073 || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
6074 /*
|
|
|
6075 * Return the text window-id and display. Only required for X-based GUI's
|
|
|
6076 */
|
|
|
6077 int
|
|
|
6078 gui_get_x11_windis(Window *win, Display **dis)
|
|
|
6079 {
|
|
|
6080 if (gui.mainwin != NULL && gui.mainwin->window != NULL)
|
|
|
6081 {
|
|
|
6082 *dis = GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window);
|
|
|
6083 *win = GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window);
|
|
|
6084 return OK;
|
|
|
6085 }
|
|
|
6086
|
|
|
6087 *dis = NULL;
|
|
|
6088 *win = 0;
|
|
|
6089 return FAIL;
|
|
|
6090 }
|
|
|
6091 #endif
|
|
|
6092
|
|
|
6093 #if defined(FEAT_CLIENTSERVER) \
|
|
|
6094 || (defined(FEAT_X11) && defined(FEAT_CLIPBOARD)) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
6095
|
|
|
6096 Display *
|
|
|
6097 gui_mch_get_display(void)
|
|
|
6098 {
|
|
|
6099 if (gui.mainwin != NULL && gui.mainwin->window != NULL)
|
|
|
6100 return GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window);
|
|
|
6101 else
|
|
|
6102 return NULL;
|
|
|
6103 }
|
|
|
6104 #endif
|
|
|
6105
|
|
|
6106 void
|
|
|
6107 gui_mch_beep(void)
|
|
|
6108 {
|
|
|
6109 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD
|
|
|
6110 GdkDisplay *display;
|
|
|
6111
|
|
|
6112 if (gui.mainwin != NULL && GTK_WIDGET_REALIZED(gui.mainwin))
|
|
|
6113 display = gtk_widget_get_display(gui.mainwin);
|
|
|
6114 else
|
|
|
6115 display = gdk_display_get_default();
|
|
|
6116
|
|
|
6117 if (display != NULL)
|
|
|
6118 gdk_display_beep(display);
|
|
|
6119 #else
|
|
|
6120 gdk_beep();
|
|
|
6121 #endif
|
|
|
6122 }
|
|
|
6123
|
|
|
6124 void
|
|
|
6125 gui_mch_flash(int msec)
|
|
|
6126 {
|
|
|
6127 GdkGCValues values;
|
|
|
6128 GdkGC *invert_gc;
|
|
|
6129
|
|
|
6130 if (gui.drawarea->window == NULL)
|
|
|
6131 return;
|
|
|
6132
|
|
|
6133 values.foreground.pixel = gui.norm_pixel ^ gui.back_pixel;
|
|
|
6134 values.background.pixel = gui.norm_pixel ^ gui.back_pixel;
|
|
|
6135 values.function = GDK_XOR;
|
|
|
6136 invert_gc = gdk_gc_new_with_values(gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
6137 &values,
|
|
|
6138 GDK_GC_FOREGROUND |
|
|
|
6139 GDK_GC_BACKGROUND |
|
|
|
6140 GDK_GC_FUNCTION);
|
|
|
6141 gdk_gc_set_exposures(invert_gc,
|
|
|
6142 gui.visibility != GDK_VISIBILITY_UNOBSCURED);
|
|
|
6143 /*
|
|
|
6144 * Do a visual beep by changing back and forth in some undetermined way,
|
|
|
6145 * the foreground and background colors. This is due to the fact that
|
|
|
6146 * there can't be really any prediction about the effects of XOR on
|
|
|
6147 * arbitrary X11 servers. However this seems to be enough for what we
|
|
|
6148 * intend it to do.
|
|
|
6149 */
|
|
|
6150 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, invert_gc,
|
|
|
6151 TRUE,
|
|
|
6152 0, 0,
|
|
|
6153 FILL_X((int)Columns) + gui.border_offset,
|
|
|
6154 FILL_Y((int)Rows) + gui.border_offset);
|
|
|
6155
|
|
|
6156 gui_mch_flush();
|
|
|
6157 ui_delay((long)msec, TRUE); /* wait so many msec */
|
|
|
6158
|
|
|
6159 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, invert_gc,
|
|
|
6160 TRUE,
|
|
|
6161 0, 0,
|
|
|
6162 FILL_X((int)Columns) + gui.border_offset,
|
|
|
6163 FILL_Y((int)Rows) + gui.border_offset);
|
|
|
6164
|
|
|
6165 gdk_gc_destroy(invert_gc);
|
|
|
6166 }
|
|
|
6167
|
|
|
6168 /*
|
|
|
6169 * Invert a rectangle from row r, column c, for nr rows and nc columns.
|
|
|
6170 */
|
|
|
6171 void
|
|
|
6172 gui_mch_invert_rectangle(int r, int c, int nr, int nc)
|
|
|
6173 {
|
|
|
6174 GdkGCValues values;
|
|
|
6175 GdkGC *invert_gc;
|
|
|
6176 GdkColor foreground;
|
|
|
6177 GdkColor background;
|
|
|
6178
|
|
|
6179 if (gui.drawarea->window == NULL)
|
|
|
6180 return;
|
|
|
6181
|
|
|
6182 foreground.pixel = gui.norm_pixel ^ gui.back_pixel;
|
|
|
6183 background.pixel = gui.norm_pixel ^ gui.back_pixel;
|
|
|
6184
|
|
|
6185 values.foreground = foreground;
|
|
|
6186 values.background = background;
|
|
|
6187 values.function = GDK_XOR;
|
|
|
6188 invert_gc = gdk_gc_new_with_values(gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
6189 &values,
|
|
|
6190 GDK_GC_FOREGROUND |
|
|
|
6191 GDK_GC_BACKGROUND |
|
|
|
6192 GDK_GC_FUNCTION);
|
|
|
6193 gdk_gc_set_exposures(invert_gc, gui.visibility != GDK_VISIBILITY_UNOBSCURED);
|
|
|
6194 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, invert_gc,
|
|
|
6195 TRUE,
|
|
|
6196 FILL_X(c), FILL_Y(r),
|
|
|
6197 (nc) * gui.char_width, (nr) * gui.char_height);
|
|
|
6198 gdk_gc_destroy(invert_gc);
|
|
|
6199 }
|
|
|
6200
|
|
|
6201 /*
|
|
|
6202 * Iconify the GUI window.
|
|
|
6203 */
|
|
|
6204 void
|
|
|
6205 gui_mch_iconify(void)
|
|
|
6206 {
|
|
|
6207 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
6208 gtk_window_iconify(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin));
|
|
|
6209 #else
|
|
|
6210 XIconifyWindow(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window),
|
|
|
6211 GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.mainwin->window),
|
|
|
6212 DefaultScreen(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window)));
|
|
|
6213 #endif
|
|
|
6214 }
|
|
|
6215
|
|
|
6216 #if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
6217 /*
|
|
|
6218 * Bring the Vim window to the foreground.
|
|
|
6219 */
|
|
|
6220 void
|
|
|
6221 gui_mch_set_foreground(void)
|
|
|
6222 {
|
|
|
6223 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
6224 gtk_window_present(GTK_WINDOW(gui.mainwin));
|
|
|
6225 # else
|
|
|
6226 gdk_window_raise(gui.mainwin->window);
|
|
|
6227 # endif
|
|
|
6228 }
|
|
|
6229 #endif
|
|
|
6230
|
|
|
6231 /*
|
|
|
6232 * Draw a cursor without focus.
|
|
|
6233 */
|
|
|
6234 void
|
|
|
6235 gui_mch_draw_hollow_cursor(guicolor_T color)
|
|
|
6236 {
|
|
|
6237 int i = 1;
|
|
|
6238
|
|
|
6239 if (gui.drawarea->window == NULL)
|
|
|
6240 return;
|
|
|
6241
|
|
|
6242 gui_mch_set_fg_color(color);
|
|
|
6243
|
|
|
6244 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.fgcolor);
|
|
|
6245 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
|
|
|
6246 if (mb_lefthalve(gui.row, gui.col))
|
|
|
6247 i = 2;
|
|
|
6248 #endif
|
|
|
6249 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
6250 FALSE,
|
|
|
6251 FILL_X(gui.col), FILL_Y(gui.row),
|
|
|
6252 i * gui.char_width - 1, gui.char_height - 1);
|
|
|
6253 }
|
|
|
6254
|
|
|
6255 /*
|
|
|
6256 * Draw part of a cursor, "w" pixels wide, and "h" pixels high, using
|
|
|
6257 * color "color".
|
|
|
6258 */
|
|
|
6259 void
|
|
|
6260 gui_mch_draw_part_cursor(int w, int h, guicolor_T color)
|
|
|
6261 {
|
|
|
6262 if (gui.drawarea->window == NULL)
|
|
|
6263 return;
|
|
|
6264
|
|
|
6265 gui_mch_set_fg_color(color);
|
|
|
6266
|
|
|
6267 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.fgcolor);
|
|
|
6268 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
6269 TRUE,
|
|
|
6270 #ifdef FEAT_RIGHTLEFT
|
|
|
6271 /* vertical line should be on the right of current point */
|
|
|
6272 CURSOR_BAR_RIGHT ? FILL_X(gui.col + 1) - w :
|
|
|
6273 #endif
|
|
|
6274 FILL_X(gui.col),
|
|
|
6275 FILL_Y(gui.row) + gui.char_height - h,
|
|
|
6276 w, h);
|
|
|
6277 }
|
|
|
6278
|
|
|
6279
|
|
|
6280 /*
|
|
|
6281 * Catch up with any queued X11 events. This may put keyboard input into the
|
|
|
6282 * input buffer, call resize call-backs, trigger timers etc. If there is
|
|
|
6283 * nothing in the X11 event queue (& no timers pending), then we return
|
|
|
6284 * immediately.
|
|
|
6285 */
|
|
|
6286 void
|
|
|
6287 gui_mch_update(void)
|
|
|
6288 {
|
|
|
6289 while (gtk_events_pending() && !vim_is_input_buf_full())
|
|
|
6290 gtk_main_iteration_do(FALSE);
|
|
|
6291 }
|
|
|
6292
|
|
|
6293 static gint
|
|
|
6294 input_timer_cb(gpointer data)
|
|
|
6295 {
|
|
|
6296 int *timed_out = (int *) data;
|
|
|
6297
|
|
|
6298 /* Just inform the caller about the occurence of it */
|
|
|
6299 *timed_out = TRUE;
|
|
|
6300
|
|
|
6301 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
6302 gtk_main_quit();
|
|
|
6303
|
|
|
6304 return FALSE; /* don't happen again */
|
|
|
6305 }
|
|
|
6306
|
|
|
6307 #ifdef FEAT_SNIFF
|
|
|
6308 /*
|
|
|
6309 * Callback function, used when data is available on the SNiFF connection.
|
|
|
6310 */
|
|
|
6311 /* ARGSUSED */
|
|
|
6312 static void
|
|
|
6313 sniff_request_cb(
|
|
|
6314 gpointer data,
|
|
|
6315 gint source_fd,
|
|
|
6316 GdkInputCondition condition)
|
|
|
6317 {
|
|
|
6318 static char_u bytes[3] = {CSI, (int)KS_EXTRA, (int)KE_SNIFF};
|
|
|
6319
|
|
|
6320 add_to_input_buf(bytes, 3);
|
|
|
6321
|
|
|
6322 if (gtk_main_level() > 0)
|
|
|
6323 gtk_main_quit();
|
|
|
6324 }
|
|
|
6325 #endif
|
|
|
6326
|
|
|
6327 /*
|
|
|
6328 * GUI input routine called by gui_wait_for_chars(). Waits for a character
|
|
|
6329 * from the keyboard.
|
|
|
6330 * wtime == -1 Wait forever.
|
|
|
6331 * wtime == 0 This should never happen.
|
|
|
6332 * wtime > 0 Wait wtime milliseconds for a character.
|
|
|
6333 * Returns OK if a character was found to be available within the given time,
|
|
|
6334 * or FAIL otherwise.
|
|
|
6335 */
|
|
|
6336 int
|
|
|
6337 gui_mch_wait_for_chars(long wtime)
|
|
|
6338 {
|
|
|
6339 int focus;
|
|
|
6340 guint timer;
|
|
|
6341 static int timed_out;
|
|
|
6342 #ifdef FEAT_SNIFF
|
|
|
6343 static int sniff_on = 0;
|
|
|
6344 static gint sniff_input_id = 0;
|
|
|
6345 #endif
|
|
|
6346
|
|
|
6347 #ifdef FEAT_SNIFF
|
|
|
6348 if (sniff_on && !want_sniff_request)
|
|
|
6349 {
|
|
|
6350 if (sniff_input_id)
|
|
|
6351 gdk_input_remove(sniff_input_id);
|
|
|
6352 sniff_on = 0;
|
|
|
6353 }
|
|
|
6354 else if (!sniff_on && want_sniff_request)
|
|
|
6355 {
|
|
|
6356 /* Add fd_from_sniff to watch for available data in main loop. */
|
|
|
6357 sniff_input_id = gdk_input_add(fd_from_sniff,
|
|
|
6358 GDK_INPUT_READ, sniff_request_cb, NULL);
|
|
|
6359 sniff_on = 1;
|
|
|
6360 }
|
|
|
6361 #endif
|
|
|
6362
|
|
|
6363 timed_out = FALSE;
|
|
|
6364
|
|
|
6365 /* this timeout makes sure that we will return if no characters arrived in
|
|
|
6366 * time */
|
|
|
6367
|
|
|
6368 if (wtime > 0)
|
|
|
6369 timer = gtk_timeout_add((guint32)wtime, input_timer_cb, &timed_out);
|
|
|
6370 else
|
|
|
6371 timer = 0;
|
|
|
6372
|
|
|
6373 focus = gui.in_focus;
|
|
|
6374
|
|
|
6375 do
|
|
|
6376 {
|
|
|
6377 /* Stop or start blinking when focus changes */
|
|
|
6378 if (gui.in_focus != focus)
|
|
|
6379 {
|
|
|
6380 if (gui.in_focus)
|
|
|
6381 gui_mch_start_blink();
|
|
|
6382 else
|
|
|
6383 gui_mch_stop_blink();
|
|
|
6384 focus = gui.in_focus;
|
|
|
6385 }
|
|
|
6386
|
|
|
6387 /*
|
|
|
6388 * Loop in GTK+ processing until a timeout or input occurs.
|
|
22
|
6389 * Skip this if input is available anyway (can happen in rare
|
|
|
6390 * situations, sort of race condition).
|
|
7
|
6391 */
|
|
22
|
6392 if (!input_available())
|
|
|
6393 gtk_main();
|
|
7
|
6394
|
|
|
6395 /* Got char, return immediately */
|
|
|
6396 if (input_available())
|
|
|
6397 {
|
|
|
6398 if (timer != 0 && !timed_out)
|
|
|
6399 gtk_timeout_remove(timer);
|
|
|
6400 return OK;
|
|
|
6401 }
|
|
|
6402 } while (wtime < 0 || !timed_out);
|
|
|
6403
|
|
|
6404 /*
|
|
|
6405 * Flush all eventually pending (drawing) events.
|
|
|
6406 */
|
|
|
6407 gui_mch_update();
|
|
|
6408
|
|
|
6409 return FAIL;
|
|
|
6410 }
|
|
|
6411
|
|
|
6412
|
|
|
6413 /****************************************************************************
|
|
|
6414 * Output drawing routines.
|
|
|
6415 ****************************************************************************/
|
|
|
6416
|
|
|
6417
|
|
|
6418 /* Flush any output to the screen */
|
|
|
6419 void
|
|
|
6420 gui_mch_flush(void)
|
|
|
6421 {
|
|
|
6422 #ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD
|
|
|
6423 if (gui.mainwin != NULL && GTK_WIDGET_REALIZED(gui.mainwin))
|
|
|
6424 gdk_display_sync(gtk_widget_get_display(gui.mainwin));
|
|
|
6425 #else
|
|
|
6426 gdk_flush(); /* historical misnomer: calls XSync(), not XFlush() */
|
|
|
6427 #endif
|
|
|
6428 #ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
6429 /* This happens to actually do what gui_mch_flush() is supposed to do,
|
|
|
6430 * according to the comment above. */
|
|
|
6431 if (gui.drawarea != NULL && gui.drawarea->window != NULL)
|
|
|
6432 gdk_window_process_updates(gui.drawarea->window, FALSE);
|
|
|
6433 #endif
|
|
|
6434 }
|
|
|
6435
|
|
|
6436 /*
|
|
|
6437 * Clear a rectangular region of the screen from text pos (row1, col1) to
|
|
|
6438 * (row2, col2) inclusive.
|
|
|
6439 */
|
|
|
6440 void
|
|
|
6441 gui_mch_clear_block(int row1, int col1, int row2, int col2)
|
|
|
6442 {
|
|
|
6443 GdkColor color;
|
|
|
6444
|
|
|
6445 if (gui.drawarea->window == NULL)
|
|
|
6446 return;
|
|
|
6447
|
|
|
6448 color.pixel = gui.back_pixel;
|
|
|
6449
|
|
|
6450 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, &color);
|
|
|
6451
|
|
|
6452 /* Clear one extra pixel at the far right, for when bold characters have
|
|
|
6453 * spilled over to the window border. */
|
|
|
6454 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window, gui.text_gc, TRUE,
|
|
|
6455 FILL_X(col1), FILL_Y(row1),
|
|
|
6456 (col2 - col1 + 1) * gui.char_width
|
|
|
6457 + (col2 == Columns - 1),
|
|
|
6458 (row2 - row1 + 1) * gui.char_height);
|
|
|
6459 }
|
|
|
6460
|
|
|
6461 void
|
|
|
6462 gui_mch_clear_all(void)
|
|
|
6463 {
|
|
|
6464 if (gui.drawarea->window != NULL)
|
|
|
6465 gdk_window_clear(gui.drawarea->window);
|
|
|
6466 }
|
|
|
6467
|
|
|
6468 /*
|
|
|
6469 * Redraw any text revealed by scrolling up/down.
|
|
|
6470 */
|
|
|
6471 static void
|
|
|
6472 check_copy_area(void)
|
|
|
6473 {
|
|
|
6474 GdkEvent *event;
|
|
|
6475 int expose_count;
|
|
|
6476
|
|
|
6477 if (gui.visibility != GDK_VISIBILITY_PARTIAL)
|
|
|
6478 return;
|
|
|
6479
|
|
|
6480 /* Avoid redrawing the cursor while scrolling or it'll end up where
|
|
|
6481 * we don't want it to be. I'm not sure if it's correct to call
|
|
|
6482 * gui_dont_update_cursor() at this point but it works as a quick
|
|
|
6483 * fix for now. */
|
|
|
6484 gui_dont_update_cursor();
|
|
|
6485
|
|
|
6486 do
|
|
|
6487 {
|
|
|
6488 /* Wait to check whether the scroll worked or not. */
|
|
|
6489 event = gdk_event_get_graphics_expose(gui.drawarea->window);
|
|
|
6490
|
|
|
6491 if (event == NULL)
|
|
|
6492 break; /* received NoExpose event */
|
|
|
6493
|
|
|
6494 gui_redraw(event->expose.area.x, event->expose.area.y,
|
|
|
6495 event->expose.area.width, event->expose.area.height);
|
|
|
6496
|
|
|
6497 expose_count = event->expose.count;
|
|
|
6498 gdk_event_free(event);
|
|
|
6499 }
|
|
|
6500 while (expose_count > 0); /* more events follow */
|
|
|
6501
|
|
|
6502 gui_can_update_cursor();
|
|
|
6503 }
|
|
|
6504
|
|
|
6505 /*
|
|
|
6506 * Delete the given number of lines from the given row, scrolling up any
|
|
|
6507 * text further down within the scroll region.
|
|
|
6508 */
|
|
|
6509 void
|
|
|
6510 gui_mch_delete_lines(int row, int num_lines)
|
|
|
6511 {
|
|
|
6512 if (gui.visibility == GDK_VISIBILITY_FULLY_OBSCURED)
|
|
|
6513 return; /* Can't see the window */
|
|
|
6514
|
|
|
6515 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.fgcolor);
|
|
|
6516 gdk_gc_set_background(gui.text_gc, gui.bgcolor);
|
|
|
6517
|
|
|
6518 /* copy one extra pixel, for when bold has spilled over */
|
|
|
6519 gdk_window_copy_area(gui.drawarea->window, gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
6520 FILL_X(gui.scroll_region_left), FILL_Y(row),
|
|
|
6521 gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
6522 FILL_X(gui.scroll_region_left),
|
|
|
6523 FILL_Y(row + num_lines),
|
|
|
6524 gui.char_width * (gui.scroll_region_right
|
|
|
6525 - gui.scroll_region_left + 1) + 1,
|
|
|
6526 gui.char_height * (gui.scroll_region_bot - row - num_lines + 1));
|
|
|
6527
|
|
|
6528 gui_clear_block(gui.scroll_region_bot - num_lines + 1,
|
|
|
6529 gui.scroll_region_left,
|
|
|
6530 gui.scroll_region_bot, gui.scroll_region_right);
|
|
|
6531 check_copy_area();
|
|
|
6532 }
|
|
|
6533
|
|
|
6534 /*
|
|
|
6535 * Insert the given number of lines before the given row, scrolling down any
|
|
|
6536 * following text within the scroll region.
|
|
|
6537 */
|
|
|
6538 void
|
|
|
6539 gui_mch_insert_lines(int row, int num_lines)
|
|
|
6540 {
|
|
|
6541 if (gui.visibility == GDK_VISIBILITY_FULLY_OBSCURED)
|
|
|
6542 return; /* Can't see the window */
|
|
|
6543
|
|
|
6544 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.fgcolor);
|
|
|
6545 gdk_gc_set_background(gui.text_gc, gui.bgcolor);
|
|
|
6546
|
|
|
6547 /* copy one extra pixel, for when bold has spilled over */
|
|
|
6548 gdk_window_copy_area(gui.drawarea->window, gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
6549 FILL_X(gui.scroll_region_left), FILL_Y(row + num_lines),
|
|
|
6550 gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
6551 FILL_X(gui.scroll_region_left), FILL_Y(row),
|
|
|
6552 gui.char_width * (gui.scroll_region_right
|
|
|
6553 - gui.scroll_region_left + 1) + 1,
|
|
|
6554 gui.char_height * (gui.scroll_region_bot - row - num_lines + 1));
|
|
|
6555
|
|
|
6556 gui_clear_block(row, gui.scroll_region_left,
|
|
|
6557 row + num_lines - 1, gui.scroll_region_right);
|
|
|
6558 check_copy_area();
|
|
|
6559 }
|
|
|
6560
|
|
|
6561 /*
|
|
|
6562 * X Selection stuff, for cutting and pasting text to other windows.
|
|
|
6563 */
|
|
|
6564 void
|
|
|
6565 clip_mch_request_selection(VimClipboard *cbd)
|
|
|
6566 {
|
|
|
6567 GdkAtom target;
|
|
|
6568 unsigned i;
|
|
|
6569 int nbytes;
|
|
|
6570 char_u *buffer;
|
|
|
6571
|
|
|
6572 for (i = 0; i < N_SELECTION_TARGETS; ++i)
|
|
|
6573 {
|
|
|
6574 received_selection = RS_NONE;
|
|
|
6575 target = gdk_atom_intern(selection_targets[i].target, FALSE);
|
|
|
6576
|
|
|
6577 gtk_selection_convert(gui.drawarea,
|
|
|
6578 cbd->gtk_sel_atom, target,
|
|
|
6579 (guint32)GDK_CURRENT_TIME);
|
|
|
6580
|
|
|
6581 while (received_selection == RS_NONE)
|
|
|
6582 gtk_main(); /* wait for selection_received_cb */
|
|
|
6583
|
|
|
6584 if (received_selection != RS_FAIL)
|
|
|
6585 return;
|
|
|
6586 }
|
|
|
6587
|
|
|
6588 /* Final fallback position - use the X CUT_BUFFER0 store */
|
|
|
6589 nbytes = 0;
|
|
|
6590 buffer = (char_u *)XFetchBuffer(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.mainwin->window),
|
|
|
6591 &nbytes, 0);
|
|
|
6592 if (nbytes > 0)
|
|
|
6593 {
|
|
|
6594 /* Got something */
|
|
|
6595 clip_yank_selection(MCHAR, buffer, (long)nbytes, cbd);
|
|
|
6596 if (p_verbose > 0)
|
|
294
|
6597 {
|
|
|
6598 verbose_enter();
|
|
7
|
6599 smsg((char_u *)_("Used CUT_BUFFER0 instead of empty selection"));
|
|
294
|
6600 verbose_leave();
|
|
|
6601 }
|
|
7
|
6602 }
|
|
|
6603 if (buffer != NULL)
|
|
|
6604 XFree(buffer);
|
|
|
6605 }
|
|
|
6606
|
|
|
6607 /*
|
|
|
6608 * Disown the selection.
|
|
|
6609 */
|
|
|
6610 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
6611 void
|
|
|
6612 clip_mch_lose_selection(VimClipboard *cbd)
|
|
|
6613 {
|
|
|
6614 /* WEIRD: when using NULL to actually disown the selection, we lose the
|
|
|
6615 * selection the first time we own it. */
|
|
|
6616 /*
|
|
|
6617 gtk_selection_owner_set(NULL, cbd->gtk_sel_atom, (guint32)GDK_CURRENT_TIME);
|
|
|
6618 gui_mch_update();
|
|
|
6619 */
|
|
|
6620 }
|
|
|
6621
|
|
|
6622 /*
|
|
|
6623 * Own the selection and return OK if it worked.
|
|
|
6624 */
|
|
|
6625 int
|
|
|
6626 clip_mch_own_selection(VimClipboard *cbd)
|
|
|
6627 {
|
|
|
6628 int success;
|
|
|
6629
|
|
|
6630 success = gtk_selection_owner_set(gui.drawarea, cbd->gtk_sel_atom,
|
|
|
6631 (guint32)GDK_CURRENT_TIME);
|
|
|
6632 gui_mch_update();
|
|
|
6633 return (success) ? OK : FAIL;
|
|
|
6634 }
|
|
|
6635
|
|
|
6636 /*
|
|
|
6637 * Send the current selection to the clipboard. Do nothing for X because we
|
|
|
6638 * will fill in the selection only when requested by another app.
|
|
|
6639 */
|
|
|
6640 /*ARGSUSED*/
|
|
|
6641 void
|
|
|
6642 clip_mch_set_selection(VimClipboard *cbd)
|
|
|
6643 {
|
|
|
6644 }
|
|
|
6645
|
|
|
6646
|
|
|
6647 #if defined(FEAT_MENU) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
6648 /*
|
|
|
6649 * Make a menu item appear either active or not active (grey or not grey).
|
|
|
6650 */
|
|
|
6651 void
|
|
|
6652 gui_mch_menu_grey(vimmenu_T *menu, int grey)
|
|
|
6653 {
|
|
|
6654 if (menu->id == NULL)
|
|
|
6655 return;
|
|
|
6656
|
|
|
6657 if (menu_is_separator(menu->name))
|
|
|
6658 grey = TRUE;
|
|
|
6659
|
|
|
6660 gui_mch_menu_hidden(menu, FALSE);
|
|
|
6661 /* Be clever about bitfields versus true booleans here! */
|
|
|
6662 if (!GTK_WIDGET_SENSITIVE(menu->id) == !grey)
|
|
|
6663 {
|
|
|
6664 gtk_widget_set_sensitive(menu->id, !grey);
|
|
|
6665 gui_mch_update();
|
|
|
6666 }
|
|
|
6667 }
|
|
|
6668
|
|
|
6669 /*
|
|
|
6670 * Make menu item hidden or not hidden.
|
|
|
6671 */
|
|
|
6672 void
|
|
|
6673 gui_mch_menu_hidden(vimmenu_T *menu, int hidden)
|
|
|
6674 {
|
|
|
6675 if (menu->id == 0)
|
|
|
6676 return;
|
|
|
6677
|
|
|
6678 if (hidden)
|
|
|
6679 {
|
|
|
6680 if (GTK_WIDGET_VISIBLE(menu->id))
|
|
|
6681 {
|
|
|
6682 gtk_widget_hide(menu->id);
|
|
|
6683 gui_mch_update();
|
|
|
6684 }
|
|
|
6685 }
|
|
|
6686 else
|
|
|
6687 {
|
|
|
6688 if (!GTK_WIDGET_VISIBLE(menu->id))
|
|
|
6689 {
|
|
|
6690 gtk_widget_show(menu->id);
|
|
|
6691 gui_mch_update();
|
|
|
6692 }
|
|
|
6693 }
|
|
|
6694 }
|
|
|
6695
|
|
|
6696 /*
|
|
|
6697 * This is called after setting all the menus to grey/hidden or not.
|
|
|
6698 */
|
|
|
6699 void
|
|
|
6700 gui_mch_draw_menubar(void)
|
|
|
6701 {
|
|
|
6702 /* just make sure that the visual changes get effect immediately */
|
|
|
6703 gui_mch_update();
|
|
|
6704 }
|
|
|
6705 #endif /* FEAT_MENU */
|
|
|
6706
|
|
|
6707 /*
|
|
|
6708 * Scrollbar stuff.
|
|
|
6709 */
|
|
|
6710 void
|
|
|
6711 gui_mch_enable_scrollbar(scrollbar_T *sb, int flag)
|
|
|
6712 {
|
|
|
6713 if (sb->id == NULL)
|
|
|
6714 return;
|
|
|
6715
|
|
|
6716 if (flag)
|
|
|
6717 gtk_widget_show(sb->id);
|
|
|
6718 else
|
|
|
6719 gtk_widget_hide(sb->id);
|
|
|
6720
|
|
791
|
6721 update_window_manager_hints(0, 0);
|
|
7
|
6722 }
|
|
|
6723
|
|
|
6724
|
|
|
6725 /*
|
|
|
6726 * Return the RGB value of a pixel as long.
|
|
|
6727 */
|
|
|
6728 long_u
|
|
|
6729 gui_mch_get_rgb(guicolor_T pixel)
|
|
|
6730 {
|
|
|
6731 GdkColor color;
|
|
|
6732 #ifndef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
6733 GdkColorContext *cc;
|
|
|
6734
|
|
|
6735 cc = gdk_color_context_new(gtk_widget_get_visual(gui.drawarea),
|
|
|
6736 gtk_widget_get_colormap(gui.drawarea));
|
|
|
6737 color.pixel = pixel;
|
|
|
6738 gdk_color_context_query_color(cc, &color);
|
|
|
6739
|
|
|
6740 gdk_color_context_free(cc);
|
|
|
6741 #else
|
|
|
6742 gdk_colormap_query_color(gtk_widget_get_colormap(gui.drawarea),
|
|
|
6743 (unsigned long)pixel, &color);
|
|
|
6744 #endif
|
|
|
6745
|
|
|
6746 return (((unsigned)color.red & 0xff00) << 8)
|
|
|
6747 | ((unsigned)color.green & 0xff00)
|
|
|
6748 | (((unsigned)color.blue & 0xff00) >> 8);
|
|
|
6749 }
|
|
|
6750
|
|
|
6751 /*
|
|
88
|
6752 * Get current mouse coordinates in text window.
|
|
7
|
6753 */
|
|
88
|
6754 void
|
|
|
6755 gui_mch_getmouse(int *x, int *y)
|
|
7
|
6756 {
|
|
88
|
6757 gdk_window_get_pointer(gui.drawarea->window, x, y, NULL);
|
|
7
|
6758 }
|
|
|
6759
|
|
|
6760 void
|
|
|
6761 gui_mch_setmouse(int x, int y)
|
|
|
6762 {
|
|
|
6763 /* Sorry for the Xlib call, but we can't avoid it, since there is no
|
|
|
6764 * internal GDK mechanism present to accomplish this. (and for good
|
|
|
6765 * reason...) */
|
|
|
6766 XWarpPointer(GDK_WINDOW_XDISPLAY(gui.drawarea->window),
|
|
|
6767 (Window)0, GDK_WINDOW_XWINDOW(gui.drawarea->window),
|
|
|
6768 0, 0, 0U, 0U, x, y);
|
|
|
6769 }
|
|
|
6770
|
|
|
6771
|
|
|
6772 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSESHAPE
|
|
|
6773 /* The last set mouse pointer shape is remembered, to be used when it goes
|
|
|
6774 * from hidden to not hidden. */
|
|
|
6775 static int last_shape = 0;
|
|
|
6776 #endif
|
|
|
6777
|
|
|
6778 /*
|
|
|
6779 * Use the blank mouse pointer or not.
|
|
|
6780 *
|
|
|
6781 * hide: TRUE = use blank ptr, FALSE = use parent ptr
|
|
|
6782 */
|
|
|
6783 void
|
|
|
6784 gui_mch_mousehide(int hide)
|
|
|
6785 {
|
|
|
6786 if (gui.pointer_hidden != hide)
|
|
|
6787 {
|
|
|
6788 gui.pointer_hidden = hide;
|
|
|
6789 if (gui.drawarea->window && gui.blank_pointer != NULL)
|
|
|
6790 {
|
|
|
6791 if (hide)
|
|
|
6792 gdk_window_set_cursor(gui.drawarea->window, gui.blank_pointer);
|
|
|
6793 else
|
|
|
6794 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSESHAPE
|
|
|
6795 mch_set_mouse_shape(last_shape);
|
|
|
6796 #else
|
|
|
6797 gdk_window_set_cursor(gui.drawarea->window, NULL);
|
|
|
6798 #endif
|
|
|
6799 }
|
|
|
6800 }
|
|
|
6801 }
|
|
|
6802
|
|
|
6803 #if defined(FEAT_MOUSESHAPE) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
6804
|
|
|
6805 /* Table for shape IDs. Keep in sync with the mshape_names[] table in
|
|
|
6806 * misc2.c! */
|
|
|
6807 static const int mshape_ids[] =
|
|
|
6808 {
|
|
|
6809 GDK_LEFT_PTR, /* arrow */
|
|
|
6810 GDK_CURSOR_IS_PIXMAP, /* blank */
|
|
|
6811 GDK_XTERM, /* beam */
|
|
|
6812 GDK_SB_V_DOUBLE_ARROW, /* updown */
|
|
|
6813 GDK_SIZING, /* udsizing */
|
|
|
6814 GDK_SB_H_DOUBLE_ARROW, /* leftright */
|
|
|
6815 GDK_SIZING, /* lrsizing */
|
|
|
6816 GDK_WATCH, /* busy */
|
|
|
6817 GDK_X_CURSOR, /* no */
|
|
|
6818 GDK_CROSSHAIR, /* crosshair */
|
|
|
6819 GDK_HAND1, /* hand1 */
|
|
|
6820 GDK_HAND2, /* hand2 */
|
|
|
6821 GDK_PENCIL, /* pencil */
|
|
|
6822 GDK_QUESTION_ARROW, /* question */
|
|
|
6823 GDK_RIGHT_PTR, /* right-arrow */
|
|
|
6824 GDK_CENTER_PTR, /* up-arrow */
|
|
|
6825 GDK_LEFT_PTR /* last one */
|
|
|
6826 };
|
|
|
6827
|
|
|
6828 void
|
|
|
6829 mch_set_mouse_shape(int shape)
|
|
|
6830 {
|
|
|
6831 int id;
|
|
|
6832 GdkCursor *c;
|
|
|
6833
|
|
|
6834 if (gui.drawarea->window == NULL)
|
|
|
6835 return;
|
|
|
6836
|
|
|
6837 if (shape == MSHAPE_HIDE || gui.pointer_hidden)
|
|
|
6838 gdk_window_set_cursor(gui.drawarea->window, gui.blank_pointer);
|
|
|
6839 else
|
|
|
6840 {
|
|
|
6841 if (shape >= MSHAPE_NUMBERED)
|
|
|
6842 {
|
|
|
6843 id = shape - MSHAPE_NUMBERED;
|
|
|
6844 if (id >= GDK_LAST_CURSOR)
|
|
|
6845 id = GDK_LEFT_PTR;
|
|
|
6846 else
|
|
|
6847 id &= ~1; /* they are always even (why?) */
|
|
|
6848 }
|
|
|
6849 else
|
|
|
6850 id = mshape_ids[shape];
|
|
|
6851 # ifdef HAVE_GTK_MULTIHEAD
|
|
|
6852 c = gdk_cursor_new_for_display(
|
|
136
|
6853 gtk_widget_get_display(gui.drawarea), (GdkCursorType)id);
|
|
7
|
6854 # else
|
|
136
|
6855 c = gdk_cursor_new((GdkCursorType)id);
|
|
7
|
6856 # endif
|
|
|
6857 gdk_window_set_cursor(gui.drawarea->window, c);
|
|
|
6858 gdk_cursor_destroy(c); /* Unref, actually. Bloody GTK+ 1. */
|
|
|
6859 }
|
|
|
6860 if (shape != MSHAPE_HIDE)
|
|
|
6861 last_shape = shape;
|
|
|
6862 }
|
|
|
6863 #endif /* FEAT_MOUSESHAPE */
|
|
|
6864
|
|
|
6865
|
|
|
6866 #if defined(FEAT_SIGN_ICONS) || defined(PROTO)
|
|
|
6867 /*
|
|
|
6868 * Signs are currently always 2 chars wide. With GTK+ 2, the image will be
|
|
|
6869 * scaled down if the current font is not big enough, or scaled up if the image
|
|
|
6870 * size is less than 3/4 of the maximum sign size. With GTK+ 1, the pixmap
|
|
|
6871 * will be cut off if the current font is not big enough, or centered if it's
|
|
|
6872 * too small.
|
|
|
6873 */
|
|
|
6874 # define SIGN_WIDTH (2 * gui.char_width)
|
|
|
6875 # define SIGN_HEIGHT (gui.char_height)
|
|
|
6876 # define SIGN_ASPECT ((double)SIGN_HEIGHT / (double)SIGN_WIDTH)
|
|
|
6877
|
|
|
6878 # ifdef HAVE_GTK2
|
|
|
6879
|
|
|
6880 void
|
|
|
6881 gui_mch_drawsign(int row, int col, int typenr)
|
|
|
6882 {
|
|
|
6883 GdkPixbuf *sign;
|
|
|
6884
|
|
|
6885 sign = (GdkPixbuf *)sign_get_image(typenr);
|
|
|
6886
|
|
|
6887 if (sign != NULL && gui.drawarea != NULL && gui.drawarea->window != NULL)
|
|
|
6888 {
|
|
|
6889 int width;
|
|
|
6890 int height;
|
|
|
6891 int xoffset;
|
|
|
6892 int yoffset;
|
|
|
6893 int need_scale;
|
|
|
6894
|
|
|
6895 width = gdk_pixbuf_get_width(sign);
|
|
|
6896 height = gdk_pixbuf_get_height(sign);
|
|
|
6897 /*
|
|
|
6898 * Decide whether we need to scale. Allow one pixel of border
|
|
|
6899 * width to be cut off, in order to avoid excessive scaling for
|
|
|
6900 * tiny differences in font size.
|
|
|
6901 */
|
|
|
6902 need_scale = (width > SIGN_WIDTH + 2
|
|
|
6903 || height > SIGN_HEIGHT + 2
|
|
|
6904 || (width < 3 * SIGN_WIDTH / 4
|
|
|
6905 && height < 3 * SIGN_HEIGHT / 4));
|
|
|
6906 if (need_scale)
|
|
|
6907 {
|
|
|
6908 double aspect;
|
|
|
6909
|
|
|
6910 /* Keep the original aspect ratio */
|
|
|
6911 aspect = (double)height / (double)width;
|
|
|
6912 width = (double)SIGN_WIDTH * SIGN_ASPECT / aspect;
|
|
|
6913 width = MIN(width, SIGN_WIDTH);
|
|
|
6914 height = (double)width * aspect;
|
|
|
6915
|
|
|
6916 /* This doesn't seem to be worth caching, and doing so
|
|
|
6917 * would complicate the code quite a bit. */
|
|
|
6918 sign = gdk_pixbuf_scale_simple(sign, width, height,
|
|
|
6919 GDK_INTERP_BILINEAR);
|
|
|
6920 if (sign == NULL)
|
|
|
6921 return; /* out of memory */
|
|
|
6922 }
|
|
|
6923
|
|
|
6924 /* The origin is the upper-left corner of the pixmap. Therefore
|
|
|
6925 * these offset may become negative if the pixmap is smaller than
|
|
|
6926 * the 2x1 cells reserved for the sign icon. */
|
|
|
6927 xoffset = (width - SIGN_WIDTH) / 2;
|
|
|
6928 yoffset = (height - SIGN_HEIGHT) / 2;
|
|
|
6929
|
|
|
6930 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.bgcolor);
|
|
|
6931
|
|
|
6932 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
6933 gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
6934 TRUE,
|
|
|
6935 FILL_X(col),
|
|
|
6936 FILL_Y(row),
|
|
|
6937 SIGN_WIDTH,
|
|
|
6938 SIGN_HEIGHT);
|
|
|
6939
|
|
|
6940 # if GTK_CHECK_VERSION(2,1,1)
|
|
|
6941 gdk_draw_pixbuf(gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
6942 NULL,
|
|
|
6943 sign,
|
|
|
6944 MAX(0, xoffset),
|
|
|
6945 MAX(0, yoffset),
|
|
|
6946 FILL_X(col) - MIN(0, xoffset),
|
|
|
6947 FILL_Y(row) - MIN(0, yoffset),
|
|
|
6948 MIN(width, SIGN_WIDTH),
|
|
|
6949 MIN(height, SIGN_HEIGHT),
|
|
|
6950 GDK_RGB_DITHER_NORMAL,
|
|
|
6951 0, 0);
|
|
|
6952 # else
|
|
|
6953 gdk_pixbuf_render_to_drawable_alpha(sign,
|
|
|
6954 gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
6955 MAX(0, xoffset),
|
|
|
6956 MAX(0, yoffset),
|
|
|
6957 FILL_X(col) - MIN(0, xoffset),
|
|
|
6958 FILL_Y(row) - MIN(0, yoffset),
|
|
|
6959 MIN(width, SIGN_WIDTH),
|
|
|
6960 MIN(height, SIGN_HEIGHT),
|
|
|
6961 GDK_PIXBUF_ALPHA_BILEVEL,
|
|
|
6962 127,
|
|
|
6963 GDK_RGB_DITHER_NORMAL,
|
|
|
6964 0, 0);
|
|
|
6965 # endif
|
|
|
6966 if (need_scale)
|
|
|
6967 g_object_unref(sign);
|
|
|
6968 }
|
|
|
6969 }
|
|
|
6970
|
|
|
6971 void *
|
|
|
6972 gui_mch_register_sign(char_u *signfile)
|
|
|
6973 {
|
|
|
6974 if (signfile[0] != NUL && signfile[0] != '-' && gui.in_use)
|
|
|
6975 {
|
|
|
6976 GdkPixbuf *sign;
|
|
|
6977 GError *error = NULL;
|
|
|
6978 char_u *message;
|
|
|
6979
|
|
|
6980 sign = gdk_pixbuf_new_from_file((const char *)signfile, &error);
|
|
|
6981
|
|
|
6982 if (error == NULL)
|
|
|
6983 return sign;
|
|
|
6984
|
|
|
6985 message = (char_u *)error->message;
|
|
|
6986
|
|
|
6987 if (message != NULL && input_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
6988 message = string_convert(&input_conv, message, NULL);
|
|
|
6989
|
|
|
6990 if (message != NULL)
|
|
|
6991 {
|
|
|
6992 /* The error message is already translated and will be more
|
|
|
6993 * descriptive than anything we could possibly do ourselves. */
|
|
|
6994 EMSG2("E255: %s", message);
|
|
|
6995
|
|
|
6996 if (input_conv.vc_type != CONV_NONE)
|
|
|
6997 vim_free(message);
|
|
|
6998 }
|
|
|
6999 g_error_free(error);
|
|
|
7000 }
|
|
|
7001
|
|
|
7002 return NULL;
|
|
|
7003 }
|
|
|
7004
|
|
|
7005 void
|
|
|
7006 gui_mch_destroy_sign(void *sign)
|
|
|
7007 {
|
|
|
7008 if (sign != NULL)
|
|
|
7009 g_object_unref(sign);
|
|
|
7010 }
|
|
|
7011
|
|
|
7012 # else /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
7013
|
|
|
7014 typedef struct
|
|
|
7015 {
|
|
|
7016 GdkPixmap *pixmap;
|
|
|
7017 GdkBitmap *mask;
|
|
|
7018 }
|
|
|
7019 signicon_T;
|
|
|
7020
|
|
|
7021 void
|
|
|
7022 gui_mch_drawsign(int row, int col, int typenr)
|
|
|
7023 {
|
|
|
7024 signicon_T *sign;
|
|
|
7025
|
|
|
7026 sign = (signicon_T *)sign_get_image(typenr);
|
|
|
7027
|
|
|
7028 if (sign != NULL && sign->pixmap != NULL
|
|
|
7029 && gui.drawarea != NULL && gui.drawarea->window != NULL)
|
|
|
7030 {
|
|
|
7031 int width;
|
|
|
7032 int height;
|
|
|
7033 int xoffset;
|
|
|
7034 int yoffset;
|
|
|
7035
|
|
|
7036 gdk_window_get_size(sign->pixmap, &width, &height);
|
|
|
7037
|
|
|
7038 /* The origin is the upper-left corner of the pixmap. Therefore
|
|
|
7039 * these offset may become negative if the pixmap is smaller than
|
|
|
7040 * the 2x1 cells reserved for the sign icon. */
|
|
|
7041 xoffset = (width - SIGN_WIDTH) / 2;
|
|
|
7042 yoffset = (height - SIGN_HEIGHT) / 2;
|
|
|
7043
|
|
|
7044 gdk_gc_set_foreground(gui.text_gc, gui.bgcolor);
|
|
|
7045
|
|
|
7046 gdk_draw_rectangle(gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
7047 gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
7048 TRUE,
|
|
|
7049 FILL_X(col),
|
|
|
7050 FILL_Y(row),
|
|
|
7051 SIGN_WIDTH,
|
|
|
7052 SIGN_HEIGHT);
|
|
|
7053
|
|
|
7054 /* Set the clip mask for bilevel transparency */
|
|
|
7055 if (sign->mask != NULL)
|
|
|
7056 {
|
|
|
7057 gdk_gc_set_clip_origin(gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
7058 FILL_X(col) - xoffset,
|
|
|
7059 FILL_Y(row) - yoffset);
|
|
|
7060 gdk_gc_set_clip_mask(gui.text_gc, sign->mask);
|
|
|
7061 }
|
|
|
7062
|
|
|
7063 gdk_draw_pixmap(gui.drawarea->window,
|
|
|
7064 gui.text_gc,
|
|
|
7065 sign->pixmap,
|
|
|
7066 MAX(0, xoffset),
|
|
|
7067 MAX(0, yoffset),
|
|
|
7068 FILL_X(col) - MIN(0, xoffset),
|
|
|
7069 FILL_Y(row) - MIN(0, yoffset),
|
|
|
7070 MIN(width, SIGN_WIDTH),
|
|
|
7071 MIN(height, SIGN_HEIGHT));
|
|
|
7072
|
|
|
7073 gdk_gc_set_clip_mask(gui.text_gc, NULL);
|
|
|
7074 }
|
|
|
7075 }
|
|
|
7076
|
|
|
7077 void *
|
|
|
7078 gui_mch_register_sign(char_u *signfile)
|
|
|
7079 {
|
|
|
7080 signicon_T *sign = NULL;
|
|
|
7081
|
|
|
7082 if (signfile[0] != NUL && signfile[0] != '-'
|
|
|
7083 && gui.drawarea != NULL && gui.drawarea->window != NULL)
|
|
|
7084 {
|
|
|
7085 sign = (signicon_T *)alloc(sizeof(signicon_T));
|
|
|
7086
|
|
|
7087 if (sign != NULL) /* NULL == OOM == "cannot really happen" */
|
|
|
7088 {
|
|
|
7089 sign->mask = NULL;
|
|
|
7090 sign->pixmap = gdk_pixmap_colormap_create_from_xpm(
|
|
|
7091 gui.drawarea->window, NULL,
|
|
|
7092 &sign->mask, NULL,
|
|
|
7093 (const char *)signfile);
|
|
|
7094
|
|
|
7095 if (sign->pixmap == NULL)
|
|
|
7096 {
|
|
|
7097 vim_free(sign);
|
|
|
7098 sign = NULL;
|
|
|
7099 EMSG(_(e_signdata));
|
|
|
7100 }
|
|
|
7101 }
|
|
|
7102 }
|
|
|
7103 return sign;
|
|
|
7104 }
|
|
|
7105
|
|
|
7106 void
|
|
|
7107 gui_mch_destroy_sign(void *sign)
|
|
|
7108 {
|
|
|
7109 if (sign != NULL)
|
|
|
7110 {
|
|
|
7111 signicon_T *signicon = (signicon_T *)sign;
|
|
|
7112
|
|
|
7113 if (signicon->pixmap != NULL)
|
|
|
7114 gdk_pixmap_unref(signicon->pixmap);
|
|
|
7115 if (signicon->mask != NULL)
|
|
|
7116 gdk_bitmap_unref(signicon->mask);
|
|
|
7117
|
|
|
7118 vim_free(signicon);
|
|
|
7119 }
|
|
|
7120 }
|
|
|
7121 # endif /* !HAVE_GTK2 */
|
|
|
7122
|
|
|
7123 #endif /* FEAT_SIGN_ICONS */
|
|
|
7124
|
